THE
FIRST
Booke
of
the
lower
cavitie
called
Abdomen
.
CAP.
I.
Of
the
division
of
the
parts
of
the
body
of
man
in
generall
.
ANatomy
is
an
The
description
of
Anatomy
.
artificiall
separation
of
the
parts
of
the
body
of
section
,
practised
to
attaine
to
the
knowledge
of
the
frame
of
it
,
and
the
use
of
each
part
.
In
Anatomicall
exercises
first
,
the
whole
carcase
doth
offer
it selfe
:
then
the
parts
.
The
whole
hath
foure
The
regions
of
the
whole
.
regions
,
to
wit
,
the
fore
and
back
parts
,
and
the
laterall
,
which
are
the
right
and
left
.
I
call
the
whole
that
which
containeth
the
What
the
whole
and
a
part
signifie
.
parts
,
and
a
part
that
which
is
contained
in
the
whole
,
according
to
the
most
ample
acception
of
the
terme
part
;
for
in
a
more
strict
acceptation
a
part
is
a
body
solid
cohering
with
the
whole
endued
with
life
,
and
framed
to
performe
some
function
.
A
part
then
must
bee
Things
required
in
a
part
being
strictly
taken
.
solid
,
the
humours
then
cannot
bee
numbred
amongst
the
parts
,
because
1
they
are
fluid
.
Secondly
,
it
must
2
have
life
,
and
so
the
extremities
of
haires
and
nailes
are
not
to
be
accounted
parts
.
Thirdly
,
one
part
3
must
not
nourish
another
,
and
so
the
bloud
,
fat
,
and
spirits
are
not
parts
.
4
Fourthly
,
it
must
have
a
circumscription
.
5
Fifthly
,
it
must
bee
united
with
the
whole
.
6
Sixthly
,
it
must
have
some
action
and
use
.
The
principall
differences
The
differences
of
parts
.
of
parts
are
taken
either
from
their
nature
or
functions
.
From
their
nature
,
parts
are
said
to
be
either
similary
or
dissimilary
.
A
similary
part
is
that
What
a
similary
part
is
.
whose
particles
are
of
the
same
substance
and
denomination
with
the
whole
:
as
every
portion
of
a
bone
is
a
bone
.
It
is
otherwise
called
a
simple
part
.
Of
simple
parts
there
The
number
of
simple
parts
.
are
ten
in
number
,
to
wit
,
the
skin
,
a
membrane
,
the
flesh
,
a
fiber
,
a
veine
,
an
artery
,
a
nerve
,
a
ligament
,
a
cartilage
,
and
a
bone
;
they
are
comprehended
in
these
two
lines
.
Cartilago
,
caro
,
membrana
,
arteria
,
nervus
;
Vena
,
ligamentum
,
cutis
,
os
,
lentissima
fibra
.
To
these
a
tendon
,
Of
a
tendon
.
which
is
the
principall
part
of
a
muscle
,
may
be
added
;
for
the
substance
of
it
is
simple
,
without
any
composition
.
Of
the
former
simple
The
differences
of
simple
parts
.
parts
some
are
simple
indeed
,
and
these
are
in
number
seven
;
the
skin
,
a
membrane
,
the
flesh
,
a
fibre
,
a
ligament
,
a
cartilage
,
a
bone
.
The
rest
are
onely
simple
to
the
eye
or
sense
,
and
not
to
reason
,
for
a
nerve
(
for
example
)
is
composed
of
many
filaments
,
covered
with
a
membrane
.
A
dissimilary
part
is
What
a
dissimilary
part
is
.
that
whose
portions
are
neither
of
the
same
substance
,
nor
the
same
denomination
,
as
a
muscle
,
in
the
which
are
flesh
,
a
nerve
and
a
tendon
.
It
is
otherwise
called
a
compound
part
,
and
an
organicall
part
.
In
an
organicall
part
Things
to
be
observed
in
an
organicall
part
.
foure
particles
are
found
;
First
,
the
chiefe
1
particle
,
as
the
crystallin
humour
in
the
eye
.
Secondly
,
that
particle
,
2
without
the
which
the
action
cannot
bee
performed
,
as
the
optick
nerve
.
Thirdly
,
that
which
3
furthereth
the
action
,
as
are
the
membranes
and
muscles
.
Fourthly
,
that
by
the
4
which
the
action
is
preserved
,
as
the
eyelids
.
Of
organicall
parts
The
degrees
of
an
organicall
part
.
there
are
foure
degrees
.
1
The
first
is
made
onely
of
the
similars
,
as
a
muscle
.
2
The
second
receiveth
the
first
kind
of
organicall
parts
,
and
other
similaries
,
as
a
finger
.
3
The
third
admitteth
those
of
the
second
degree
,
as
the
hand
.
4
The
fourth
is
made
of
the
third
and
other
parts
,
as
the
arme
.
Parts
from
their
function
The
differences
of
parts
taken
from
their
function
.
are
said
to
bee
either
sustaining
or
sustained
.
The
bones
sustaine
the
frame
of
the
whole
body
,
the
rest
are
sustained
.
Now
these
are
the
cavities
or
the
limbs
.
CAP.
II.
Of
the
circumscription
,
regions
,
substance
,
and
parts
of
the
abdomen
.
OF
all
the
parts
of
the
body
which
are
sustained
,
wee
are
to
begin
dissection
with
the
cavities
:
First
,
because
they
offer
themselves
to
the
view
in
the
fore
region
of
the
body
.
Secondly
,
because
they
being
moyst
,
and
apt
to
receive
the
impression
of
the
externall
heat
,
soonest
putrefie
,
and
send
out
noysome
smels
.
The
cavities
are
appointed
to
receive
the
principall
parts
,
and
those
which
minister
unto
them
.
Wherefore
there
are
three
cavities
according
to
the
number
of
the
principall
parts
.
The
head
is
for
the
braine
,
the
breast
is
for
the
heart
,
and
the
belly
for
the
liver
.
And
because
this
cavity
is
most
subject
to
putrefaction
,
you
are
to
begin
at
it
.
Now
foure
things
concerning
it
offer
themselves
.
First
,
the
circumscription
or
bounding
of
it
.
Secondly
,
the
regions
of
it
.
Thirdly
,
the
substance
of
it
.
Fourthly
,
the
speciall
parts
of
it
.
As
concerning
the
circumscription
of
it
,
it
is
severed
from
the
brest
by
the
midrife
.
It
is
bounded
above
by
the
cartilago
ensiformis
,
and
beneath
with
the
share
bones
.
The
regions
of
it
are
three
,
the
uppermost
,
middlemost
,
and
lowermost
.
The
uppermost
which
is
bounded
betweene
the
mucronita
cartilago
,
and
three
inches
above
the
navell
,
about
the
ending
of
the
short
ribs
,
hath
three
parts
:
The
laterall
,
which
are
called
hypochondria
,
or
subcartilaginea
,
because
they
be
under
the
cartilages
of
the
short
ribs
.
In
the
right
hypochondrium
lyeth
the
greatest
part
of
the
liver
,
but
in
the
left
the
spleen
,
and
greatest
part
of
the
stomack
.
The
third
part
is
that
which
before
lyeth
betweene
the
two
laterall
parts
,
and
is
properly
called
epigastrium
,
because
the
stomack
lyeth
under
it
.
In
this
part
remarkable
is
the
pit
of
the
brest
,
which
is
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
or
scrobiculus
cordis
,
by
the
moderne
Writers
.
The
middlemost
part
extendeth
it selfe
from
three
inches
above
the
navell
,
to
three
inches
under
it
.
The
fore
part
is
where
the
navell
is
,
from
whence
it
is
called
regio
umbilicalis
.
The
two
laterall
parts
have
no
proper
denominations
.
In
the
right
are
contained
intestinum
caecum
with
part
of
Colon.
In
the
left
part
of
it
,
a
portion
of
Iejunum
and
the
rest
of
colon
.
The
rest
of
Iejunum
is
under
the
navell
.
The
navell
in
man
is
wrinkled
,
as
the
forehead
of
an
aged
woman
;
but
in
other
creatures
it
is
onely
a
hard
knot
without
haires
,
having
no
wrinkle
.
It
hath
no
laterall
parts
,
having
no
proper
names
,
although
Laurentius
lib.
6.
Histor.
Anatom
.
affirmeth
it
to
have
,
and
give
them
names
;
in
this
region
is
contained
the
whole
hungry
gut
.
The
lower
region
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
:
This
region
3
The
lower
region
.
hath
three
parts
,
the
laterall
,
and
the
middlemost
:
The
laterall
which
reach
to
the
hypochondria
,
are
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
because
they
are
the
seat
of
lust
,
which
is
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
By
Hippoc
.
they
are
termed
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
because
they
being
placed
betweene
the
hanch-bones
and
ribs
,
are
lanke
,
and
seeme
to
containe
nothing
.
In
Latine
they
are
called
Ilia
.
Ilia
,
because
the
iliam
intestina
lieth
under
them
on
every
side
.
Besides
this
in
the
right
part
are
placed
portions
of
the
colon
,
&
caecum
intestinum
,
which
are
tyed
together
.
In
the
left
part
are
contained
a
great
part
of
the
colon
,
and
the
intestinum
rectum
.
The
fore
part
of
the
hypogastrium
by
Aristot.
lib.
I.
Histor.
animal.
3.
is
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
which
Gaza
calleth
Abdomen
and
Sumen
.
Under
it
lieth
the
pubes
,
which
word
signifieth
both
the
haires
,
and
the
place
where
the
haires
grow
,
which
appeare
to
budde
in
girles
the
twelft
yeere
,
but
in
boyes
the
fourteenth
yeere
,
when
way
is
made
for
the
monethly
courses
and
seed
,
the
skin
being
there
made
thinner
,
the
heat
increasing
in
them
.
At
the
sides
of
the
pubes
appeare
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
or
inguina
,
Inguina
.
the
groines
.
Under
this
middle
region
,
are
contained
the
bladder
,
the
intestinum
rectum
,
and
the
matrix
in
women
.
The
hindermost
parts
The
hindermost
parts
.
are
called
lumbi
the
loines
,
and
they
reach
from
the
bending
of
the
back
to
the
buttocks
called
nates
ab
innitenda
,
because
when
we
sit
,
we
rest
upon
them
.
The
fleshy
part
on
each
side
is
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
à
palpando
,
from
calling
or
clapping
.
In
the
right
loyne
,
the
right
kidney
;
but
in
the
left
,
the
left
kidney
is
contained
.
CAP.
III.
Of
the
common
containing
parts
of
the
belly
.
THe
common
containing
parts
of
the
belly
are
foure
,
the
skarf-skin
,
the
skin
,
the
fat
,
and
the
membrana
carnosa
.
The
skin
in
man
is
called
cutis
,
but
in
beasts
aluta
,
in
Greeke
it
is
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
and
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
;
either
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
because
it
is
easily
flead
off
,
or
from
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
seeing
it
is
the
end
and
superficies
of
the
whole
body
:
Of
all
the
membranes
of
the
body
,
it
is
the
thickest
.
It
hath
a
double
substance
;
the
one
is
externall
1
Culitula
.
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
because
it
is
placed
upon
the
skin
as
a
cover
,
but
is
termed
cuticula
in
Latin
;
for
it
is
as
large
as
the
skin
,
and
more
compact
;
for
watrish
sharp
humours
passing
through
the
skin
are
stayed
by
the
thicknesse
of
this
,
and
so
pustules
are
caused
.
In
man
it
is
as
the
peelings
in
onions
.
It
is
without
bloud
,
and
without
feeling
.
Three
causes
concurre
to
the
generation
of
it
;
to
wit
,
the
materiall
cause
is
a
viscous
and
oleous
vapour
of
the
bloud
.
The
internall
efficient
cause
,
the
naturall
heat
of
the
subjacent
parts
,
raising
it
up
.
The
externall
efficient
cause
is
the
externall
coldnes
,
partly
of
the
aire
,
partly
of
the
skin
it selfe
:
It
is
engendered
even
as
the
thin
skin
in
milk
,
and
fat
broths
:
It
is
hardly
separate
from
the
skin
with
a
knife
;
but
easily
in
living
creatures
,
by
a
vesicatory
,
and
in
dead
persons
by
fire
,
or
scalding
hot
water
.
1.
The
use
of
it
is
to
defend
the
skin
,
which
is
of
an
equisit
sense
,
from
externall
immoderate
,
either
heat
,
or
cold
.
In
cold
weather
it
breaketh
the
cold
,
that
the
perspiration
should
not
be
altogether
hindered
:
In
hot
weather
by
it
compactnesse
,
it
hindereth
too
great
perspiration
.
Secondly
,
to
be
a
middle
betweene
the
skin
and
the
object
of
feeling
.
Thirdly
,
to
stay
the
ichorous
substance
from
issuing
from
the
veines
and
arteries
;
for
this
we
see
when
the
cuticula
is
rubbed
off
by
any
meanes
.
The
true
skin
is
six
2
times
thicker
than
the
skarfe
skin
:
in
children
,
women
,
and
those
which
are
borne
in
hot
contreyes
,
it
is
thinner
,
but
in
men
,
and
in
those
who
inhabit
cold
countries
,
it
is
thicker
.
The
Negroes
become
black
,
because
they
having
a
softer
skin
,
and
large
pores
and
loose
,
many
vapours
of
the
adjust
humours
,
which
are
raised
with
the
sweat
,
the
grosser
substance
whereof
by
reason
of
the
excessive
heat
,
being
dryed
and
burned
,
caused
the
blacknesse
of
the
skin
;
for
their
infants
are
not
borne
black
,
but
redish
;
and
they
afterwords
become
black
,
the
cuticula
growing
in
them
as
in
us
.
The
skin
in
the
forehead
and
sides
it
is
thin
,
thinner
yet
in
the
palme
of
the
hand
,
but
thinnest
of
all
in
the
lips
and
cods
.
In
the
head
,
back
,
and
under
the
heele
it
is
thickest
.
Under
the
heele
,
the
cuticula
in
some
will
be
as
thick
as
a
barley
corne
.
The
pores
will
appeare
in
the
skin
in
the
winter
time
,
it
being
bared
;
for
where
they
are
,
the
cuticula
will
appeare
as
a
Goose
skin
.
The
skin
hath
an
action
,
to
wit
,
the
sense
of
feeling
.
Pinguedo
,
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
est
humor
3.
Of
fat
.
mor
oleosus
nostri
corporis
a
calore
moderato
subjectarum
illi
partium
elevatus
,
ac
inter
membranam
carnosam
ac
cutem
concrescens
,
quae
partes
sunt
densiores
ac
frigidiores
.
Ejus
Its
kinds
.
2.
sunt
species
,
axungia
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
&
saevum
sive
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
They
differ
,
for
first
,
axungia
is
in
beasts
not
horned
,
which
are
full
toothed
;
but
saevum
in
beasts
not
horned
,
which
are
not
full
toothed
.
Secondly
,
axungia
is
easily
melted
,
but
not
so
easily
congealed
;
but
saevum
is
not
easily
melted
,
but
is
easily
congealed
.
Thirdly
,
grease
is
not
brittle
,
but
tallow
is
.
The
fat
under
the
skin
is
grease
;
but
in
the
caule
,
kidneies
,
the
heart
,
the
eyes
,
and
about
the
joynts
it
is
tallow
.
The
uses
of
it
are
these
:
First
,
it
defendeth
the
body
from
the
aire
;
So
Apothecaries
when
they
meane
to
preserve
juyces
,
they
powre
oyle
upon
them
.
Secondly
,
it
preserveth
the
naturall
heat
.
Thirdly
,
it
furthereth
beauty
by
filling
up
the
wrinkles
of
the
skin
.
Fourthly
,
in
the
muscles
it
filleth
up
the
empty
places
,
it
is
under
the
vessels
that
they
may
passe
safely
;
in
the
entrals
it
helpeth
concoction
,
in
the
buttocks
it
is
as
downe
in
a
pillow
.
Membrana
carnosa
or
4
Membrana
carnosa
.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
so
called
in
man
,
not
that
it
is
in
him
fleshy
,
but
nervous
,
and
so
nervea
;
but
because
in
beasts
,
which
the
Ancients
used
most
commonly
to
dissect
,
it
is
endued
with
fleshy
fibers
,
in
the
birth
it
is
red
,
but
in
those
of
ripe
age
white
;
in
the
forehead
and
neck
,
it
is
more
fleshy
.
Within
it
is
bedewed
with
a
viseuous
humour
,
to
further
their
motion
by
keeping
the
superficies
of
them
,
from
desiccation
,
which
otherwise
might
fall
out
by
reason
of
their
motion
.
It
is
of
an
exquisit
sense
,
whereof
when
it
is
pricked
with
sharp
humours
it
causeth
groouing
:
such
as
are
felt
in
the
beginning
of
ague
fits
.
First
,
it
preserveth
Its
uses
.
the
heat
of
the
internall
parts
.
Secondly
it
furthereth
the
gathering
of
the
fat
.
Thirdly
,
it
strengtheneth
the
vessels
,
which
passe
betweene
it
and
the
skin
.
CAP.
IV.
Of
the
proper
containing
parts
.
THe
proper
containing
parts
are
the
muscles
of
the
belly
,
and
the
peritonaeum
.
Of
the
muscles
we
have
spoken
else
where
,
a
pag.
24
ad
35.
&
245.
&
256.
Peritonaeum
is
tyed
above
to
the
midrife
,
below
to
the
share
and
flanke
bones
,
in
the
forepart
firmly
to
the
transverse
muscles
,
but
chiefly
to
their
tendons
about
the
linea
alba
,
behind
to
the
fleshy
heads
of
these
muscles
loosely
and
the
membrane
of
the
nerves
,
which
come
from
the
vertebrae
of
the
lovnes
.
The
end
of
this
firme
connexion
is
to
presse
equally
the
belly
,
for
the
expulsion
of
the
ordure
and
breathing
.
If
this
connexion
had
not
beene
,
the
peritonaeum
would
have
become
wrinkled
,
the
muscles
being
contracted
.
If
it
had
not
beene
loose
tyed
to
the
fleshy
parts
,
the
contraction
of
them
in
the
compression
of
the
belly
had
beene
hindered
.
As
for
the
proceeding
of
it
,
Fallopius
will
have
it
to
proceed
from
a
strong
twisting
of
sinewes
,
from
whence
the
mesenterium
hath
its
beginning
.
Some
will
have
it
to
proceed
from
the
ligaments
,
by
the
which
the
vertebrae
of
the
loynes
and
the
ossacrum
are
tyed
together
.
Picolhomineus
will
have
them
to
be
framed
of
those
nerves
which
spring
out
of
the
spinalis
medulla
about
the
first
,
and
third
vertebrae
of
the
loynes
,
which
are
tyed
together
by
both
the
menings
,
when
they
marche
further
:
Here
it
is
very
thick
,
because
it
was
to
bee
much
extended
.
It
is
double
every
where
,
but
chiefly
about
the
vertebrae
of
the
loynes
,
where
betweene
the
duplications
lie
the
vena
cava
,
the
aorta
,
and
the
kidneies
.
In
the
hypagastrium
two
tunicles
are
apparently
seene
,
betweene
which
the
bladder
and
matrix
lie
.
All
the
parts
which
receive
nourishment
from
the
vena
cava
,
are
seated
betweene
the
coats
,
as
the
afore
named
parts
;
but
those
which
receive
nourishment
from
the
vena
porta
,
as
are
they
which
serve
for
concoction
of
the
nourishment
,
are
not
,
the
umbilicall
vessels
also
are
placed
in
the
duplicature
of
the
peritonaeum
,
that
they
may
march
the
more
safely
.
To
the
beginning
of
the
productions
of
the
peritonaeum
,
the
inner
coat
cleaveth
firmly
,
and
shutteth
the
hole
,
by
the
which
the
spermatick
vessels
passe
from
the
lower
part
of
the
belly
.
If
this
be
broken
,
the
outer
coat
is
relaxed
,
and
so
a
rupture
is
caused
.
The
Peritonaeum
is
thickost
;
First
,
where
there
are
maniest
humours
,
to
hinder
the
breaking
of
the
subjacent
part
,
and
issuing
out
of
them
,
as
above
the
stomack
.
Secondly
,
where
many
vessels
,
and
spirits
are
,
as
above
the
spleen
.
Thirdly
,
where
much
stretching
is
required
,
as
above
the
bladder
,
matrix
and
stomack
.
CAP.
V.
Of
the
Omentum
.
THe
parts
contained
Of
the
parts
contained
in
the
lower
belly
.
serve
either
for
nutrition
,
or
procreation
.
As
for
the
parts
serving
for
nutrition
,
they
either
serve
for
chylification
,
or
sanguification
.
The
principall
efficient
cause
of
chylification
,
is
the
stomack
;
but
the
adjuvants
,
are
the
caule
and
the
pancreas
.
The
principall
efficient
causes
of
sanguification
,
are
the
liver
,
and
spleen
,
but
the
other
parts
are
the
adjuvant
causes
.
Of
these
some
receive
the
excrements
of
the
chylification
,
as
the
guts
.
The
excrements
of
the
sanguification
are
two
,
choler
,
and
the
watrish
humour
.
The
thin
choler
is
received
by
the
vesica
fellea
;
but
the
grosse
choler
,
by
the
meatus
cholidochus
:
The
watrish
humour
is
turned
to
the
kidnies
,
and
from
thence
to
the
bladder
,
by
the
vreters
.
The
parts
appointed
for
procreation
,
are
the
genitals
,
both
in
men
,
and
women
.
Next
then
to
the
Peritonaeum
is
the
Omentum
,
or
caul
,
in
Greeke
it
is
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
because
it
seemeth
to
swim
above
the
upper
guts
.
The
Arabians
call
it
Zirbus
.
It
is
composed
of
two
It
s
substance
.
membranes
.
The
uppermost
doth
spring
about
the
bottome
of
the
stomack
,
from
the
common
coat
of
it
,
and
is
tyed
to
the
hollow
part
of
the
liver
and
spleen
.
The
lowermost
doth
It
s
connexion
.
spring
from
the
Peritonaeum
,
immediatly
under
the
midrife
towards
the
back
,
and
is
tyed
to
the
hollow
part
of
the
liver
,
to
the
midrife
,
to
the
duodenum
intestinum
,
to
the
convex
part
of
the
spleen
,
and
last
of
all
,
to
all
that
part
of
the
colon
which
marcheth
under
the
stomack
.
It
hath
veines
onely
Its
veines
.
from
porta
gastroepiplois
dextra
&
sinistra
:
they
are
inserted
into
the
upper
membrane
;
but
epiplois
dextra
,
&
postica
in
to
the
inferiour
membrane
.
It
hath
so
many
arteries
Its
arteries
.
from
ramus
soeliacus
,
&
mesenteruus
.
It
hath
Its
sinews
.
small
sinews
from
the
costale
branch
of
the
sixt
paire
.
It
hath
much
fat
:
if
it
be
plentifull
,
and
the
caule
reach
to
the
os
pubis
,
in
women
it
causeth
sterility
,
by
compressing
the
mouth
of
the
matrix
;
in
men
it
causeth
a
rupture
,
by
relaxing
the
peritonaeum
:
This
rupture
is
called
epiploenterocele
.
In
figure
it
representeth
It
s
figure
.
6.
De
Anat.
administ
.
a
Faulkners
pouch
,
according
to
Galen
:
The
mouth
is
round
,
and
the
bottom
is
made
by
the
two
membranes
joyned
together
.
This
will
appeare
if
you
fill
it
with
water
,
by
Galens
advice
.
It
is
then
of
substance
The
reason
of
the
frame
of
it
.
membranous
,
that
it
might
admit
dilatation
,
and
extension
.
It
is
thin
,
that
it
should
not
burden
the
subjacent
parts
;
it
is
compact
to
hinder
the
dissipation
of
the
internall
heat
,
and
to
repell
the
externall
cold
.
The
fat
is
about
the
veines
and
arteries
,
to
The
fat
.
strengthen
them
,
from
being
compressed
by
the
repletion
of
the
belly
,
and
other
motions
.
When
the
stomack
is
full
,
and
the
guts
empty
,
the
upper
membrane
is
raised
,
the
lower
remaining
in
its
owne
place
;
but
if
the
guts
bee
full
,
and
the
stomack
empty
,
then
the
lower
membrane
riseth
up
,
the
upper
remaining
in
is
town
place
.
It
is
tyed
to
the
stomack
,
being
a
middle
part
betweene
the
colon
and
the
spleen
,
and
that
it
should
not
totter
from
side
to
side
.
It
is
tyed
in
the
right
side
to
the
colon
and
liver
,
but
in
the
left
side
to
the
spleene
.
It
hath
its
beginning
It
s
beginning
from
those
parts
unto
which
it
is
tyed
,
that
it
might
receive
veines
and
arteries
from
thence
for
bloud
,
and
life
.
The
lower
part
is
free
and
untyed
,
that
sometimes
the
upper
,
sometimes
the
lower
membrane
might
rise
up
.
The
uses
of
it
are
three
:
First
,
it
cherisheth
the
internall
heat
of
the
stomack
and
intestins
.
Secondly
,
it
ministreth
nourishment
to
the
parts
in
time
of
famine
,
Galen
.
de
us
.
part
.
li.
4.
c.
II.
The
third
is
to
containe
the
humours
flowing
from
the
intestins
,
which
the
glandules
cannot
receive
wholly
at
one
time
,
Hippoc.
lib.
de
glandalis
.
Creatures
which
have
An
observation
.
no
caule
,
help
the
concoction
,
by
doubling
their
hinder
legs
and
resting
their
belly
upon
them
,
as
Hares
and
Connies
.
They
who
have
had
a
Another
.
portion
of
it
cut
off
,
because
it
was
corrupted
,
having
fallen
out
,
by
reason
of
a
wound
received
in
the
abdomen
,
have
afterward
a
weake
concoction
,
and
are
enforced
to
cover
the
belly
well
.
See
Galen
.
lib.
4.
de
usis
.
part.
9.
where
he
proveth
this
by
example
.
CAP.
VI.
Of
the
Guia.
THe
Gullet
or
weazand
The
marching
of
it
.
is
an
organicall
part
,
which
beginneth
about
the
root
of
the
tongue
,
and
passeth
from
thence
directly
betweene
the
wind-pipe
,
the
vertebrae
of
the
neck
,
and
the
foure
first
vertebrae
of
the
brest
,
upon
the
which
it
resteth
;
but
when
it
is
come
to
the
fift
vertebra
of
the
brest
,
it
giveth
way
to
the
trunke
of
the
great
artery
descending
by
turning
a
little
to
the
right
side
:
afterward
accompanying
the
arterie
to
the
ninth
vertebra
,
there
it
is
raised
up
by
means
of
the
membranes
from
the
vertebra
,
and
marching
above
the
arterie
,
it
passeth
through
the
nervous
body
of
the
midrife
,
and
is
inserted
into
the
left
orifice
of
the
ventriculus
,
about
the
eleventh
vertebra
of
the
brest
.
It
is
called
properly
The
names
of
it
.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
quia
angustus
&
longus
.
See
Aristor
.
I.
histor.
animal
.
16.
It
is
also
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
quod
cibum
ad
ventriculum
vehat
.
It
is
framed
of
three
It
s
structure
membranes
.
The
first
is
the
uttermost
and
common
compassing
the
two
proper
,
which
it
hath
either
from
the
peritonaeum
according
to
some
,
or
from
the
ligaments
of
the
vertebrae
of
the
necke
and
brest
upon
which
it
resteth
.
The
second
is
the
middlemost
,
and
it
is
fleshie
and
thicke
,
and
hath
only
transverse
fibres
.
The
third
is
the
innermost
,
and
it
is
membranous
,
and
hath
only
small
and
straight
fibres
.
It
is
joyned
to
that
It
s
connexion
.
membrane
which
covereth
the
throat
,
palat
,
mouth
and
lips
;
so
that
before
vomiting
,
signes
in
the
lips
will
appeare
.
It
hath
veins
both
from
The
vessels
.
the
vena
cava
,
and
the
porta
:
for
it
hath
sprigs
from
vena
sine
pari
while
it
is
yet
in
the
brest
;
but
where
it
is
joyned
to
the
ventricle
,
it
hath
some
twigs
from
ramus
coronarius
,
which
proceedeth
from
the
porta
.
It
hath
Arteries
from
the
intercostal
arteries
,
and
ramus
caeliacus
coronarius
.
Nerves
it
hath
from
the
sixth
paire
,
which
are
carried
obliquely
for
fafetie
,
as
Galen
noteth
6.
de
usu
part.
6.
and
are
very
many
;
which
is
the
cause
that
the
parts
about
the
upper
orifice
of
the
ventricle
are
so
sensible
.
It
hath
foure
Glandules
;
Its
Glandules
.
two
in
the
throat
,
which
are
called
Tonsillae
,
or
almonds
,
common
to
the
Weazand
and
the
larynx
,
which
prepare
the
pituitous
humour
to
moysten
them
:
other
two
it
hath
about
the
middle
of
it
towards
the
backe
about
that
place
,
where
the
aspera
arteria
is
divided
into
two
branches
,
under
which
it
lieth
.
The
weazand
serveth
The
use
of
it
.
as
a
funnell
to
carry
meat
and
drinke
to
the
maw
,
for
it
receiveth
them
by
dilating
its
proper
internall
coat
,
and
turneth
them
downe
by
the
constriction
of
the
middlemost
coat
,
and
the
muscules
of
the
Pharynx
.
CAP.
VII
.
Of
the
Ventriculus
or
stomacke
.
THat
part
which
we
It
s
denomination
.
terme
the
stomack
in
English
,
in
Latine
is
called
Ventriculus
,
to
distinguish
it
from
the
great
ventricles
.
In
Greeke
,
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
and
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
from
its
cavitie
.
It
is
placed
immediatly
It
s
situation
.
under
the
midrife
,
which
it
toucheth
,
wherfore
if
it
bee
too
full
,
it
causeth
a
difficulty
of
breathing
by
hindering
the
motion
of
it
.
In
the
forepart
,
and
in
the
right
side
,
it
is
covered
with
the
hollow
part
of
the
liver
:
in
the
left
side
by
the
spleen
;
towards
the
back
by
the
aorta
,
the
vena
cava
,
and
the
pancreas
,
which
further
its
heat
.
The
bignesse
of
it
is
It
s
bignesse
.
commonly
such
,
as
is
capable
to
receive
so
much
food
at
one
time
,
as
is
sufficient
for
nutrition
.
It
is
lesse
in
women
than
in
men
,
to
give
way
to
the
distention
of
the
matrix
.
They
who
have
large
mouths
,
have
large
stomacks
.
It
is
joined
with
the
It
s
connexion
.
gula
on
the
left
side
,
where
its
upper
orifice
is
;
it
is
tyed
to
the
duodenum
,
where
the
lower
orifice
is
on
the
right
side
.
The
bottome
is
joyned
to
the
upper
part
of
the
caule
.
The
substance
of
it
is
It
s
substance
.
membranous
,
that
it
might
admit
distention
and
constriction
.
It
hath
three
membranes
.
The
first
is
common
,
which
it
hath
from
the
peritonaeum
about
the
upper
orifice
;
it
is
the
thickest
of
all
those
which
spring
from
the
peritonaeum
,
the
fibres
of
it
are
strait
.
The
second
is
fleshy
,
and
the
fibres
of
it
are
transverse
,
under
which
a
few
oblique
and
fleshy
lye
.
The
third
is
membranous
,
endued
with
all
kinds
of
fibres
,
the
straight
are
most
conspicuous
and
plentifull
,
to
embrace
the
food
firmly
,
untill
chylification
be
perfected
,
as
the
second
membrane
hath
oblique
to
expell
the
chylus
.
It
hath
also
two
orifices
.
Its
orifices
.
The
one
is
in
the
left
1
side
,
called
sinistrum
wider
than
that
in
the
right
,
that
meat
not
well
chewed
might
the
better
passe
;
It
is
called
in
Greek
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
Cor
,
from
whence
the
paines
which
happen
in
it
are
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
and
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
because
there
is
a
great
consent
betweene
it
and
the
heart
,
by
reason
of
the
twigs
of
nerves
,
which
proceed
from
the
same
branch
,
which
doe
spring
from
the
sixth
paire
communicat
to
both
,
so
that
one
being
affected
primarily
,
the
other
must
suffer
by
consent
.
This
hath
orbicular
fibres
,
that
the
meat
and
drink
being
once
received
within
the
capacity
of
the
stomack
,
it
might
bee
exactly
shut
,
lest
fumes
and
the
heat
should
break
out
,
which
might
hinder
concoction
.
The
other
by
the
Grecians
is
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
janitor
,
or
doore-keeper
,
because
it
as
a
Porter
doth
make
way
for
the
Chylus
to
descend
to
the
duodenum
:
It
is
not
wide
as
the
other
orifice
,
because
it
was
onely
to
transmisse
the
elaborate
Chylus
:
wherefore
besides
its
transverse
fibres
,
it
hath
a
thicke
&
compact
circle
representing
the
sphinter
muscule
,
that
it
might
the
more
easily
open
and
shut
.
It
hath
veines
,
first
from
Its
Veines
the
trunck
of
vena
porta
,
and
this
is
pytoricus
ramus
,
or
from
the
branches
of
the
same
:
wherefore
from
ramus
splenicus
it
hath
gastrica
,
from
whence
Coronaria
springeth
;
Gastroepiplois
sinistra
,
&
vas
breve
,
from
the
ramus
mesentericus
.
before
it
bee
divided
it
hath
Gastroepiplois
dextra
.
It
hath
Arteries
from
Its
arteries
.
ramus
coeliacus
,
which
doe
accompany
every
veine
.
It
hath
many
Nerves
from
the
sixt
pair
,
which
with
the
gula
passing
through
the
midrife
crosse
one
another
;
for
the
right
sinew
doth
compasse
the
left
and
fore
part
;
but
the
left
,
the
right
and
hinder
part
of
the
stomacke
.
So
that
the
upper
part
of
the
stomacke
is
of
an
exquisite
sense
.
These
three
vessels
passe
betweene
the
common
and
proper
coats
,
and
end
in
their
orifices
in
the
internall
membrane
.
It
is
the
seat
of
hunger
,
The
cause
of
hunger
.
and
soonest
doth
feele
the
defect
of
aliment
:
for
blood
being
spent
in
the
veins
,
upon
the
nourishment
of
the
body
,
the
fibres
of
the
internall
membrane
of
the
stomacke
are
contracted
,
and
so
this
paine
which
is
called
hunger
is
caused
.
The
action
of
the
stomacke
It
s
action
Chylus
.
is
Chylification
:
now
Chylus
is
a
white
juyce
reasonable
thicke
like
Barley
creame
,
wrought
by
the
faculty
of
the
stomacke
out
of
the
aliments
.
This
is
chiefly
elaborate
by
the
heat
of
the
stomacke
,
yet
the
adjacent
parts
putting
to
their
helping
hands
;
as
in
the
right
side
,
the
liver
;
in
the
left
,
the
spleene
:
above
the
midrife
,
below
the
guts
,
before
the
caule
,
behinde
the
trunckes
of
vena
cava
and
the
aorta
.
This
heat
of
the
stomacke
is
temperate
,
and
somewhat
moist
,
that
this
concoction
might
resemble
boyling
.
Of
figure
,
it
is
round
It
s
figure
.
moderately
,
partly
that
it
should
not
take
too
much
room
,
partly
that
it
might
receive
much
.
It
is
somewhat
long
and
hath
two
orifices
higher
than
the
bottome
,
lest
fone
should
have
been
in
the
bottome
,
the
aliment
unconcocted
should
have
issued
out
of
it
.
CAP
VIII
.
Of
the
Intestines
or
Guts
.
THe
guts
are
called
The
etymon
.
in
Latine
Intestina
,
in
Greeke
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
They
begin
at
the
Pylorus
,
and
end
in
the
fundament
.
They
have
a
round
figure
,
The
figure
.
that
they
might
containe
sufficient
nourishment
.
They
are
of
a
membranous
Their
substance
.
substance
,
that
they
might
readily
constriction
and
dilation
.
In
length
they
are
six
Their
length
.
times
as
long
as
the
whole
body
.
They
have
three
coats
,
Their
coats
.
one
common
from
the
Peritonaeum
,
but
mediatly
;
for
in
the
duodenum
,
and
that
part
of
the
colon
which
cleaveth
to
the
stomack
,
it
proceedeth
immediatly
from
the
lower
membrane
of
the
caul
;
but
in
the
jejunum
,
●leum
,
the
rest
of
the
colon
,
and
the
thick
guts
it
proceedeth
from
the
membranes
of
the
mesenterium
.
They
have
two
proper
,
to
retaine
,
and
expell
readily
;
The
outermost
is
membranous
,
the
innermost
nervous
,
although
it
seeme
to
bee
fleshy
,
by
reason
of
the
crusty
substance
,
with
the
which
it
is
lyned
;
which
is
framed
of
the
excrements
of
the
third
concoction
of
the
guts
themselves
.
It
is
also
glased
with
a
mucous
substance
,
which
is
nothing
else
but
an
excrementiticus
fleamy
substance
,
bred
in
the
first
concoction
:
This
furthereth
the
expulsion
of
the
faeces
,
and
hindereth
excoriation
,
which
might
be
caused
when
sharp
humors
passe
thorow
them
.
This
internall
membrane
The
fibres
.
in
the
small
guts
hath
oblique
fibres
,
but
the
externall
transverse
,
because
these
are
appointed
for
the
retention
and
expulsion
of
the
chylus
.
But
in
the
thick
guts
,
the
inner
membrane
hath
transverse
,
but
the
outer
hath
oblique
and
straight
,
because
they
are
appointed
for
the
expulsion
of
the
excrements
:
The
inner
membrane
of
the
small
guts
is
full
of
wrinkles
,
to
stay
the
chylus
from
passing
too
soone
.
Between
the
common
coat
and
those
which
are
proper
,
the
vena
&
arteris
Mesaraicae
march
.
The
veins
flow
from
the
Their
veins
.
porca
,
although
not
from
the
same
branch
:
For
the
duodenus
surculus
is
sent
into
the
duodenum
,
and
the
Haemorrhoidalis
,
to
the
left
part
of
the
colon
,
and
the
whole
rectum
,
as
the
dexter
mesentericus
is
sent
to
the
jejunum
,
caecum
,
ileum
,
and
the
right
part
of
the
colon
.
Epiplois
postica
,
is
inserted
into
the
middle
part
of
the
colon
,
which
marcheth
transversly
under
the
stomacke
;
besides
these
a
sprig
from
the
ramus
epigastricus
of
the
vena
cava
is
sent
to
the
intestinum
rectum
,
which
maketh
the
externall
haemorrhoidal
.
The
Arteries
spring
The
Arteries
.
partly
from
ramus
Caeliacus
,
partly
from
both
the
mesentericae
,
to
the
duodenum
,
and
the
beginning
of
Iejunum
,
a
sprig
is
sent
from
the
right
ramus
Caeliacus
:
but
to
the
rest
of
the
Iejunum
,
to
ileum
,
caecum
,
and
the
right
part
of
Colon
mesentericus
superior
:
to
the
left
part
of
Colon
,
and
to
the
intestinum
rectum
,
mesentericus
inferior
is
sent
.
At
the
last
,
epiplois
postica
,
which
riseth
from
the
lower
part
of
Arteria
spleaica
,
which
is
the
left
branch
of
arteria
caeliaca
,
is
sent
to
the
middle
part
of
Colon
,
which
lieth
under
the
stomacke
.
Nerves
they
have
from
The
Nerves
the
sixth
paire
:
the
duodenum
hath
small
twigs
from
the
stomack
,
which
goe
to
the
Pylorus
.
The
other
guts
have
very
many
,
which
spring
from
the
branch
,
which
is
bestowed
upon
the
roots
of
the
ribs
:
but
the
intestinum
rectum
,
about
the
podex
hath
four
twigs
from
the
fifth
conjugation
of
those
which
spring
from
the
os
sacrum
.
This
is
the
cause
why
so
great
paine
is
felt
in
the
Colon
,
&
rectum
,
when
they
are
ill
affected
.
The
guts
have
fat
The
fat
.
without
,
and
not
within
.
The
guts
are
of
two
The
differences
of
the
guts
.
sorts
;
for
they
are
either
thin
or
thicke
.
The
thin
which
have
The
thin
.
thinner
membranes
are
in
number
three
.
1
The
first
is
duodenum
,
because
it
is
thought
to
have
twelve
inches
in
length
.
It
doth
passe
directly
under
the
stomack
to
the
beginning
of
those
guts
which
begin
to
bee
gathered
by
the
mesentereum
,
for
this
is
tied
with
it
.
2
The
second
is
Iejunum
,
or
the
hungrie
gut
;
for
in
dead
carcasses
it
is
for
the
most
part
found
emptie
;
partly
by
reason
of
the
multitude
of
the
veins
,
partly
by
reason
of
the
acrimony
of
the
choler
,
which
proceedeth
pure
from
the
liver
.
In
length
it
is
12.
hands
bredth
and
three
inches
,
and
as
broad
as
the
ring
finger
.
The
internall
membrane
is
longer
than
the
externall
;
for
it
hath
innumerable
orbicular
,
and
transverse
wrinkles
to
stay
the
chylus
.
It
beginneth
on
the
right
side
,
under
the
colon
,
where
the
dnodenum
endeth
,
and
the
guts
begin
to
be
wreathed
,
and
filling
almost
the
whole
umbilical
region
,
it
endeth
into
the
ileum
:
of
all
other
guts
it
hath
greatest
store
of
veins
and
arteries
;
and
by
these
you
may
finde
the
circumscription
of
it
.
Meatns
biliaerius
is
inserted
into
the
beginning
of
this
gut
which
sendeth
choler
from
the
gall
,
which
pricketh
the
guts
to
hasten
expulsion
.
3
The
third
is
Ileum
,
it
hath
thinner
membranes
than
the
rest
of
the
tenuia
.
It
is
seated
under
the
navell
,
and
filleth
both
the
Ilia
.
It
is
the
longest
of
all
the
guts
,
for
in
length
it
containeth
21.
hand-bredth
,
but
it
is
the
narrowest
of
all
,
for
it
is
but
an
inch
in
bredth
.
It
hath
fewer
wrinkles
than
the
jejunum
,
and
lesser
,
which
about
the
end
of
it
scarcely
appeare
.
It
beginneth
where
both
smaller
and
fewer
veins
appeare
,
and
endeth
about
the
place
of
the
right
kidnie
,
where
it
is
joyned
both
with
the
intestinum
coecum
,
&
colon
.
The
externall
coat
of
the
tenuia
intestina
is
more
thin
and
fleshy
than
the
internall
.
It
hath
transverse
and
orbicular
fibres
,
with
a
few
straight
to
strengthen
the
transverse
.
The
internall
coat
it
hath
partly
straight
,
partly
oblique
fibres
.
Yet
fewer
straight
than
the
crassa
intestina
have
.
These
guts
have
a
motion
inch
as
wormes
have
when
they
crawl
,
or
leeches
when
they
suck
,
to
draw
downward
the
chylus
:
for
it
is
not
in
our
power
to
send
this
away
,
as
we
doe
the
excrements
.
The
crassa
intestina
have
not
this
motion
,
and
by
reason
of
this
motion
the
upper
part
of
the
gut
may
be
wrapped
in
the
lower
,
which
causeth
the
sicknesse
called
Ileos
or
convolvulus
.
Now
follow
the
Intestina
The
thick
guts
.
crassa
,
the
great
guts
,
they
are
three
in
number
also
.
1
The
first
is
called
Coecum
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
the
blind
gut
,
because
one
end
of
it
is
shut
,
so
that
at
the
same
orifice
the
chylus
passeth
,
and
returneth
.
In
man
it
is
like
a
thick
round
worme
coyled
together
.
It
is
bigger
in
an
infant
than
in
a
man
,
foure
inches
in
length
and
one
in
bredth
.
It
is
not
tyed
to
the
mesenterium
;
but
being
couched
round
,
it
is
tyed
to
the
right
kidnie
.
In
sound
persons
it
is
alwais
empty
.
In
foure
footed
beast
;
it
is
alwaies
full
of
excrements
.
Apes
have
it
larger
than
a
man
,
Dogs
larger
than
Apes
;
but
Conies
,
Squirrels
and
Rats
,
largest
of
all
,
if
you
consider
the
proportion
of
their
bodies
.
2
The
second
is
Colon
,
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
:
because
it
detaineth
the
excrements
.
It
hath
it
beginning
from
Ileum
&
coecum
,
and
mounting
up
by
the
dextrum
ilium
,
when
it
comes
to
the
liver
,
it
passeth
transversly
under
the
stomack
to
the
left
ilium
,
and
from
thence
to
the
beginning
of
os
sacrum
.
It
is
tied
first
to
the
right
kidnie
in
the
right
side
,
by
the
externall
membrane
,
then
in
the
middle
to
the
bottom
of
the
stomack
,
and
at
the
last
unto
the
left
kidney
.
In
length
,
it
is
of
seven
hand
bredth
,
and
seven
inches
.
It
is
the
broadest
of
all
others
,
that
it
might
containe
all
the
excrements
.
It
hath
cels
,
which
spring
from
the
internal
tunicle
of
it
;
These
cels
are
kept
in
their
figure
,
by
a
ligament
halfe
an
inch
broad
,
which
passeth
thorow
the
upper
and
middle
part
of
it
all
alongst
;
this
being
broken
or
dissolved
,
the
cels
appeare
no
more
.
Their
use
is
to
hinder
the
flowing
of
the
excrements
to
one
place
,
which
would
compresse
the
parts
adjacent
.
It
hath
a
value
where
it
is
joyned
with
ileum
,
like
to
the
Sigmoides
in
the
Sinus
of
the
heart
.
This
value
so
stoppeth
the
hole
which
is
common
to
the
ilcon
and
colon
,
that
flatuosity
cannot
ascend
to
the
Ileum
,
much
lesse
excrements
regurgitat
.
If
one
would
find
this
cut
,
let
him
powre
in
water
into
the
intestinum
rectum
,
and
hold
up
the
guts
.
The
water
will
stay
when
it
is
come
to
the
value
,
if
it
bee
found
.
If
this
value
be
relaxed
by
sicknesse
,
excrements
may
regurgitat
,
and
expelled
by
vomit
and
clysters
,
also
come
to
stomack
.
The
third
is
Intestinum
rectum
,
the
straight
gut
;
it
hath
its
beginning
where
the
colon
endeth
,
&
endeth
where
it
maketh
the
anus
:
it
is
of
a
〈◊〉
in
length
,
not
so
wide
as
the
colon
,
the
muscle
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
is
at
the
end
of
it
:
It
hath
thick
and
fleshy
externall
coats
,
and
so
a
solution
of
unity
in
it
may
the
sooner
be
united
.
It
hath
many
transverse
fibres
,
few
oblique
,
and
some
straight
.
It
hath
veins
not
from
Porta
onely
as
the
rest
;
but
from
the
trunck
of
the
cava
descending
also
,
which
make
the
externall
Hemorrhoidall
.
The
guts
have
a
three-fold
use
,
for
first
they
all
concoct
the
Chylus
sent
from
the
stomack
better
.
Secondly
,
the
small
guts
digest
the
Chylus
.
Thirdly
,
the
thick
guts
expell
the
excrements
.
CAP.
IX
.
Of
the
Mesenterium
.
THe
substance
is
membranous
,
First
,
that
it
might
bee
light
,
and
should
not
presse
together
the
vessell
by
its
weight
;
Secondly
,
that
it
might
be
extended
into
all
dimensions
,
by
reason
of
the
fibres
;
Thirdly
,
that
betweene
the
membranes
it
might
the
more
readily
gather
fat
.
It
is
of
a
circular
figure
,
which
is
most
capable
,
that
it
might
answer
the
length
of
the
guts
,
and
keepe
them
within
a
small
compasse
and
place
likewise
.
It
is
framed
of
two
proper
membranes
,
one
above
another
,
strong
enough
,
and
one
common
,
between
which
&
the
proper
the
vessels
passe
safely
to
the
guts
.
The
veins
are
called
Mesaraicae
,
these
spring
from
ramus
mesentericus
,
dexter
&
sinister
branches
of
the
Vena
porta
.
It
hath
also
two
arteries
,
the
one
superiour
,
the
other
inferiour
branches
of
the
arteria
mesenterica
,
which
passe
as
the
veins
doe
.
As
for
the
nerves
,
it
hath
two
on
each
side
,
springing
from
the
branches
of
the
sixt
paire
,
which
goe
to
the
roots
of
the
ribs
;
others
it
hath
from
those
which
spring
from
the
spin
lis
medulla
,
betweene
the
first
,
second
,
third
and
fourth
vertebra
of
the
loynes
.
That
the
vessels
might
passe
safely
without
ruption
,
Nature
hath
placed
glandules
between
Glandules
.
the
divarications
of
the
veines
and
arteries
.
The
biggest
of
these
The
biggest
.
is
about
the
center
of
the
mesaraeum
,
where
the
distribution
of
the
vessels
beginneth
.
If
this
become
scirrhous
,
the
extenuation
of
the
whole
body
ensueth
,
because
the
passing
of
the
chylus
is
hindered
:
leane
persons
have
larger
glandules
than
the
fat
,
because
the
fat
doth
sufficiently
guard
the
distribution
of
the
vessels
,
and
preserveth
the
heat
of
the
vessels
.
The
arteries
bring
spirit
;
but
the
veins
doe
bring
both
the
chylus
to
the
liver
,
and
nourishment
to
the
inner
parts
;
but
not
at
the
same
time
:
As
wee
take
breath
by
,
and
let
it
out
by
the
same
instruments
,
but
not
at
the
same
time
:
see
Galen
3.
facult
.
nat
.
13.
&
4.
de
us
.
part
.
14.
So
at
one
time
the
liver
draweth
from
the
belly
,
and
at
another
time
the
belly
from
the
liver
.
When
the
guts
are
full
,
the
chylus
is
sent
to
the
liver
;
but
when
they
are
empty
,
they
draw
nourishment
.
It
hath
two
parts
,
Mesaraeum
,
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
and
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
quas
!
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
The
first
tyeth
the
small
guts
together
;
the
second
the
thick
.
The
Mesaraeum
is
in
the
The
bignesse
of
the
mesaraeum
.
circumference
3.
yards
,
but
a
span
in
bredth
.
It
springeth
from
the
It
s
beginning
.
ligaments
of
the
vertebrae
of
the
loynes
,
by
two
roots
;
the
largest
about
the
first
vertebra
;
the
other
lesser
,
about
the
third
.
It
was
fit
that
it
should
be
tyed
strongly
to
these
ligaments
,
lest
it
might
have
beene
torne
by
violent
motions
,
or
bee
pulled
from
thence
by
the
weight
of
the
guts
being
full
.
And
as
plants
draw
their
nourishment
by
their
roots
from
the
earth
,
so
living
creatures
which
have
bloud
,
draw
their
nutriment
from
the
guts
,
by
the
mesaraick
veins
.
Wherefore
lest
they
should
suffer
ruption
,
Nature
would
have
them
to
passe
safely
betweene
membranes
.
The
use
of
it
then
is
to
cary
safely
the
vessels
which
passe
to
the
guts
.
It
is
tyed
before
to
the
small
guts
;
but
behind
to
the
first
and
third
vertebra
of
the
loynes
,
from
whence
it
springeth
.
It
is
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
&
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
quasi
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
is
that
by
the
Mesocolon
.
which
the
thick
guts
are
tyed
together
.
Hippoc.
6.
Epid.
&
Galen
.
4.
Aphor
.
6.
make
mention
of
this
.
It
is
tyed
in
the
right
side
,
to
the
right
part
of
the
Ileum
;
but
in
the
left
side
to
the
left
part
of
Ileum
,
and
the
muscle
Psoas
:
before
it
is
tyed
to
the
colon
,
&
rectum
intestinum
.
CAP.
X.
Of
the
venae
lacteae
.
THis
is
the
opinion
of
all
the
ancient
and
moderne
Writers
,
concerning
the
mesenterie
,
and
the
mesaraicall
,
if
you
except
Caspar
Asellius
,
who
by
his
diligence
found
these
veins
,
which
hee
calleth
lacteas
,
because
they
contain
Why
so
called
.
a
white
juice
,
which
is
nothing
else
but
the
chylus
elaborate
,
which
they
carry
from
the
smal
guts
to
the
liver
.
Their
beginning
seemeth
Their
beginning
.
to
bee
in
the
Pancreas
,
for
there
they
all
meet
,
and
are
strangely
implicate
and
twisted
together
:
from
thence
they
passe
upward
to
the
liver
,
and
downeward
to
the
small
guts
:
so
that
the
Pancreas
is
a
more
excellent
part
than
it
hath
beene
hitherto
taken
by
other
Anatomists
:
and
as
the
mothers
blood
before
it
be
sent
by
the
vasa
umbilicalia
to
nourish
the
Infant
,
is
first
committed
to
the
placenta
uteri
,
to
draw
from
it
all
impuritie
:
so
then
these
venae
lacteae
,
discharge
their
impurities
before
they
carry
the
chylus
to
the
liver
in
the
Pancreas
.
They
are
inserted
into
the
small
guts
,
Their
insertion
.
and
have
nothing
to
doe
with
the
stomack
.
They
passe
into
the
capacity
of
the
guts
,
and
end
in
the
wrinkled
crust
,
with
the
which
the
internall
membrane
of
the
guts
is
lined
with
their
spongious
heads
like
to
Leeches
,
by
the
which
they
draw
to
themselves
the
chylus
.
From
the
small
guts
Their
progress
.
they
march
between
the
two
membranes
of
the
mesenterium
,
sometimes
severed
from
the
other
vessels
,
sometimes
joyned
with
them
,
sometimes
directly
,
sometimes
over-riding
them
,
making
a
Saint
Andrewes
crosse
thorow
the
glandules
,
untill
they
come
to
the
Pancreas
,
where
they
are
inexplicably
twisted
one
with
another
:
from
thence
having
greater
branches
,
they
passe
by
the
sides
of
vena
porta
to
the
cavitie
of
the
liver
,
where
they
are
spent
by
ending
there
by
small
twists
:
and
so
it
is
most
likely
that
sanguification
is
performed
by
the
substance
of
the
liver
,
and
not
by
the
veins
:
the
grosser
part
of
it
being
sent
to
the
branches
of
vena
porta
,
and
the
subtillest
to
the
branches
of
vena
cava
;
They
differ
from
the
The
difference
between
them
and
the
ordinary
mesaraicall
veins
.
ordinary
masaraicall
veins
;
First
,
in
bignesse
,
for
these
are
bigger
,
but
those
are
more
in
number
,
for
they
are
twice
as
many
:
for
more
chylus
must
bee
sent
to
the
liver
to
make
blood
of
for
the
nourishment
of
the
whole
body
,
than
blood
for
the
nourishing
of
the
inward
parts
onely
.
Secondly
,
the
values
Their
values
.
which
are
seene
about
the
endings
of
these
,
are
placed
from
without
inwards
,
but
of
those
from
within
outwards
.
The
reason
of
this
diversitie
is
this
:
the
venae
lacteae
suck
the
chylus
from
the
guts
which
ought
not
to
returne
,
but
the
ordinary
mesaraicall
send
blood
,
and
sometimes
excrementitious
humours
,
which
ought
not
to
come
back
againe
.
If
you
would
finde
How
to
find
them
out
.
out
these
veins
,
you
must
feed
a
dogge
with
milke
,
and
five
or
six
houres
afterward
dissect
his
belly
;
then
by
stretching
the
mesenterie
you
shall
perceive
them
.
That
the
ancients
did
Why
the
Ancients
did
not
find
these
out
.
not
find
out
these
veins
,
the
cause
is
,
either
because
they
dissected
beasts
after
they
were
dead
,
or
after
that
the
chylus
was
distributed
,
or
they
did
presently
take
a
view
of
the
mesentery
;
but
made
some
stay
about
the
inspection
of
some
other
part
.
They
have
no
trunck
,
Why
they
have
no
trunck
.
because
they
were
to
end
in
the
liver
,
and
to
go
no
further
.
From
this
part
many
diseases
spring
;
first
,
because
it
is
composed
of
two
membranes
,
having
innumerable
veins
and
arteries
,
and
so
it
may
containe
many
impurities
;
secondly
,
because
it
hath
many
glandules
,
which
as
a
sponge
imbibe
superfluities
.
CAP.
XI
.
Of
the
Pancreas
.
IT
is
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
and
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
It
is
the
biggest
glandule
of
the
whole
body
,
and
very
red
,
like
unto
soft
flesh
,
from
whence
it
hath
its
name
.
In
figure
it
is
ovall
,
three
or
foure
inches
in
length
.
It
is
placed
in
the
left
side
towards
the
spleen
;
above
the
stomack
resteth
upon
it
:
below
,
the
membranes
of
the
peritonaeum
lie
,
unto
which
it
is
firmly
tied
.
It
doth
keep
within
it selfe
ramus
splenicus
,
the
left
branch
of
arteria
coeliaca
;
the
nerves
which
passe
from
the
sixt
paire
to
the
stomack
and
the
duodenum
.
It
hath
a
membrane
from
the
peritonaeum
,
by
the
which
it
is
covered
and
holden
up
.
It
hath
three
uses
.
First
,
it
staieth
the
liver
lest
it
being
distended
by
too
much
meat
and
drink
,
should
be
hurt
by
the
hardnesse
of
the
vertebrae
of
the
back
.
Secondy
,
to
keep
the
vessels
passing
through
it
,
from
ruption
.
Thirdly
,
to
keepe
these
same
from
compression
,
when
the
stomack
is
to
much
stretched
by
meat
and
drink
.
CAP.
XII
.
Of
the
Liver
.
Now
follow
the
parts
appointed
for
sanguification
,
whereof
the
Liver
is
the
chiefest
.
THe
substance
of
the
liver
seemeth
to
be
a
red
fleshy
masse
.
In
the
first
formation
of
the
birth
,
it
is
framed
of
bloud
wizing
out
of
the
veins
,
and
there
coagulating
about
them
.
The
substance
of
the
liver
is
so
set
about
the
branches
of
the
vena
porta
&
cava
,
that
it
filleth
up
all
cavities
and
doth
firmly
stay
them
;
keeping
them
open
from
pursing
together
,
and
in
comely
order
that
they
be
not
confounded
.
It
is
the
thickest
and
heaviest
of
all
other
entrals
.
It
is
bigger
in
man
than
any
other
living
It
s
bignesse
.
creature
,
if
you
consider
the
proportion
of
his
body
;
for
it
was
fit
so
to
bee
,
seeing
man
was
to
have
greatest
store
of
bloud
,
lest
spirits
should
faile
in
performing
the
functions
of
the
soule
,
wherewith
man
is
most
copiously
furnished
.
Besides
,
seeing
he
hath
but
one
liver
,
the
bignesse
was
to
recompence
the
number
:
we
may
guesse
of
the
bignesse
of
it
by
the
bignes
of
the
fingers
.
It
is
covered
with
a
very
thin
membrane
,
which
springeth
from
the
second
ligament
of
the
liver
,
which
cleaveth
firmly
to
the
substance
of
the
liver
.
If
it
be
separat
at
any
time
by
a
watrish
humor
issuing
out
of
the
vessels
from
the
fleshie
substance
,
watrish
pustulls
by
the
Grecians
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
are
ingendered
.
If
these
doe
breake
,
the
water
falleth
into
the
cavity
of
the
belly
,
and
causeth
that
kind
of
dropsie
called
ascites
.
It
hath
veins
as
well
from
the
cava
as
the
porta
.
The
branches
of
the
Its
veins
.
cava
are
distributed
for
the
most
part
thorow
the
gibbous
part
;
but
those
of
the
porta
,
into
the
holow
part
:
yet
so
that
the
branches
of
both
are
joyned
by
inosculation
to
deliver
the
purest
bloud
to
the
vena
cava
,
for
the
nourishing
of
the
vitall
parts
,
and
the
grosest
by
the
branches
of
the
porta
,
or
the
nourishing
of
the
naturall
.
There
seemeth
to
be
three
times
more
of
the
twigs
of
the
porta
,
than
of
the
cava
within
the
liver
.
Amongst
the
midst
of
the
branches
of
the
porta
,
some
little
veins
march
;
which
afterward
be
comming
one
twig
,
end
in
the
vesicula
fellea
,
that
the
bilious
humour
may
be
sent
to
it
,
before
the
bloud
enter
into
the
vena
cava
.
It
hath
onely
few
arteries
,
Its
arteries
.
which
springing
from
the
right
branch
of
the
coeliaca
end
in
the
hollow
part
of
the
liver
,
where
the
vena
porta
commeth
out
.
It
hath
two
nerves
,
but
Its
nerves
.
very
small
,
because
it
hath
but
a
dull
sense
.
One
commeth
from
the
branch
which
is
sent
to
the
upper
orifice
of
the
stomack
;
the
other
from
that
branch
which
is
dispersed
thorow
the
roots
of
the
ribs
of
the
right
side
.
As
for
the
figure
of
it
,
It
s
figure
.
it
is
almost
round
,
the
upper
part
is
arched
and
smooth
;
and
so
framed
that
it
might
not
hurt
the
diaphragma
.
The
lower
part
is
hollow
to
receive
the
stomack
,
which
is
of
a
sphericall
figure
.
In
the
upper
and
convex
Its
ties
.
part
,
which
is
distant
but
one
inch
from
the
diaphragma
,
to
give
way
to
it
when
it
is
dilated
in
breathing
,
and
to
the
stretching
of
the
stomacke
,
it
is
tied
first
to
the
diaphragma
,
by
a
ligament
membranous
,
broad
,
and
strong
,
which
springeth
from
the
peritonaeum
,
where
it
covereth
the
midrife
in
the
lower
part
.
It
passeth
transversly
by
the
liver
,
to
the
hinder
parts
,
by
this
ligament
;
it
is
staied
from
faling
downe
.
It
is
called
the
suspensory
.
Secondly
,
in
the
fore
part
it
is
staied
by
two
ties
;
by
the
first
it
is
tied
to
the
mucronata
cartilago
,
to
hinder
it
from
faling
to
the
back
parts
,
when
wee
stretch
our
back
:
This
ligament
is
broad
,
double
,
and
strong
;
and
springeth
from
the
peritonaeum
,
and
giveth
the
liver
its
coat
.
Into
this
coat
the
2.
sinews
are
implanted
according
to
Galen
,
lib.
3.
de
loc.
effect
.
cap.
.
3.
and
not
into
the
substance
of
the
liver
,
so
that
according
to
Galen
,
4.
de
us
.
part
.
cap.
13.
it
hath
but
a
dull
feeling
,
such
as
plants
have
to
embrace
that
which
is
profitable
,
and
to
leave
that
which
is
unprofitable
.
By
the
second
it
is
tied
to
the
navell
;
this
is
the
umbilicall
veine
,
which
when
the
infant
is
borne
●eeseth
its
hollownesse
,
and
becommeth
a
ligament
.
This
staieth
it
from
being
pulled
upwards
.
Thirdly
,
it
is
tied
to
the
short
ribs
,
by
small
fibres
,
to
keep
it
steady
.
In
the
hollow
part
it
is
tied
by
the
mesenterium
,
to
the
ribs
by
the
vena
cava
.
It
differeth
from
the
Its
differences
from
the
liver
of
beasts
.
liver
of
beasts
,
in
that
it
hath
seldome
any
lobes
,
yet
the
hollow
part
of
it
hath
a
fissure
or
chink
,
wherein
the
umbilicall
veine
is
implanted
,
and
two
small
bunchings
out
in
the
right
part
where
the
vena
porta
marcheth
out
,
which
Galen
calleth
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
gates
.
Besides
these
there
is
A
little
lobe
.
a
little
lobe
of
a
softer
and
thinner
substance
,
than
is
the
rest
of
the
liver
,
and
is
covered
with
a
membrane
:
It
is
tied
to
the
omentum
by
this
lobe
,
by
the
which
Spigel
.
de
human
.
corp.
fabric
.
lib.
8.
cap.
12
thinketh
that
waters
may
be
discharged
out
of
the
liver
into
the
caul
.
It
is
placed
in
the
It
s
situation
.
lower
belly
in
the
right
side
covered
with
the
ribs
for
safety
,
and
in
the
middle
of
the
trunck
of
the
body
to
send
bloud
equally
to
the
upper
and
lower
parts
.
The
stomack
is
cherished
by
it
,
and
the
spleen
;
But
because
it
is
a
more
noble
part
than
the
spleen
,
it
is
placed
in
the
right
hypochondrium
.
The
proper
action
of
It
s
action
.
it
is
not
only
to
further
sanguification
,
perfected
in
the
veins
,
as
all
ancient
Anatomists
aver
;
but
to
sanguifie
the
chylus
,
caried
to
it
by
vena
lacteae
,
as
Asellius
hath
proved
.
One
thing
is
to
be
noted
,
A
note
.
that
the
substance
of
the
liver
,
in
the
convex
part
,
where
the
vena
cava
is
lodged
,
is
softer
than
that
which
is
in
the
hollow
part
,
where
the
vena
partae
is
:
for
there
it
may
be
more
easily
separate
from
the
vessels
,
than
here
;
and
not
without
cause
:
for
the
roots
of
vena
portae
ought
to
bee
staied
by
a
harder
substance
,
that
they
bee
kept
wider
;
but
the
roots
of
the
cava
with
a
softer
,
that
they
might
the
readier
be
filled
,
stretched
,
and
slacked
.
CAP.
XIII
.
Of
the
vena
portae
.
SEeing
the
roots
of
the
veins
which
Nature
harh
appointed
to
furnish
bloud
,
the
nutriment
of
the
body
,
have
their
roots
in
the
liver
:
Having
discoursed
of
it
,
method
doth
require
to
set
downe
the
doctrine
of
them
.
Although
there
is
but
The
veins
of
it
.
one
artery
to
impart
life
,
yet
there
are
two
veines
,
the
vena
portae
&
cava
.
Because
come
require
a
grosser
bloud
for
nutrition
,
as
those
parts
are
,
which
serve
the
nutritive
faculty
,
which
are
,
the
liver
,
the
gall
,
the
stomack
,
the
spleen
,
the
p●●●●us
,
the
●●●e●●tum
,
the
guts
,
and
the
mesentery
.
For
unto
the
rest
as
the
kidn●ies
,
bladder
,
and
those
which
are
appointed
for
procreation
,
the
vena
cava
sendeth
branches
.
It
is
fit
to
begin
with
the
vena
portae
,
because
Vena
portae
.
it
goeth
no
further
than
to
the
parts
contained
in
the
abdomen
,
and
not
to
all
those
neither
.
It
is
so
called
because
Why
so
called
.
it
seemeth
to
enter
into
the
liver
,
by
the
two
fleshy
bunches
,
called
portae
,
gates
.
This
doth
differ
from
How
it
differeth
from
vena
cava
.
the
vena
cava
.
First
,
in
substance
;
for
the
substance
of
this
is
thicker
and
blacker
,
because
it
is
nourished
with
thick
and
black
bloud
;
but
that
of
the
vena
cava
,
is
whiter
and
thinner
,
because
it
is
nourished
with
a
thinner
and
redder
bloud
.
Secondly
,
the
substance
of
the
vena
portae
is
harder
than
that
of
the
cava
:
which
ought
to
be
softer
,
because
it
ought
to
be
more
apt
for
dilatation
and
constriction
;
first
,
because
it
containeth
a
more
movable
bloud
;
partly
because
its
thinner
,
having
much
serosity
mingled
with
it
;
partly
because
for
the
most
part
the
branches
of
it
are
accompanied
with
the
branches
of
the
great
artery
,
whereas
the
branches
of
the
porta
are
farre
enough
off
,
if
you
except
ramus
splenicus
.
Thirdly
,
the
truncke
of
vena
cava
is
larger
than
that
of
porta
,
because
it
nourisheth
more
parts
,
as
hath
been
said
.
Fourthly
,
the
porta
hath
more
roots
within
the
substance
of
the
liver
than
the
cava
.
The
roots
of
the
vena
portae
and
cava
are
joyned
by
the
unition
called
Anastomasis
How
inosculation
is
performed
.
or
inosculation
.
This
is
performed
by
two
waies
:
First
,
when
the
ending
of
one
doth
meet
with
the
end
,
of
the
other
:
as
the
epigastricae
venae
meet
with
the
mammariae
in
the
lower
side
of
the
muscal
recti
.
Secondly
,
when
one
branch
resting
upon
an
other
,
doe
cleave
together
,
having
a
hole
in
the
middle
.
This
inosculation
is
seene
in
the
roots
of
the
vena
portae
,
and
the
cava
.
One
thing
is
to
be
noted
,
A
note
.
that
there
are
many
of
the
twigs
of
the
vena
portae
,
which
touch
not
those
of
the
cava
:
Because
the
purest
part
of
the
bloud
was
onely
to
be
caried
to
the
vena
cava
,
and
the
thickest
,
to
remaine
in
the
vena
portae
.
By
reason
of
these
Anastomases
,
in
famine
nourishment
is
sent
from
the
habit
of
the
body
,
by
the
vena
cava
,
to
nourish
the
internall
parts
.
Bauhin
affirmeth
,
that
there
is
a
common
conduit
to
the
roots
of
vena
portae
&
cava
,
which
in
it
cavity
will
receive
a
smal
probe
.
In
these
veins
,
besides
bloud
,
excrementitious
humors
are
also
contained
in
diseased
persons
,
which
sometimes
are
sent
from
the
whole
body
by
the
vena
cava
into
the
guts
,
&
sometimes
communicate
to
the
vena
cava
by
vena
portae
.
How
the
inosculation
of
these
veins
is
found
out
.
To
find
out
the
radication
and
inosculation
of
these
veins
,
you
must
boyle
the
liver
untill
it
become
soft
,
&
so
with
a
woodden
or
bone
knife
separate
the
substance
from
the
vessels
;
for
a
sharp
knife
is
not
fit
.
Now
to
come
to
distribution
The
distribution
of
vena
portae
.
of
vena
portae
,
i
hath
parts
.
1
Radices
,
the
roots
.
2.
Truncus
,
the
trunck
.
3.
Rami
,
the
branches
.
4.
Surculi
,
twigs
.
As
for
the
roots
,
first
Its
roots
.
from
the
circumference
of
the
liver
,
small
capillar
veins
march
towards
the
inner
part
of
it
,
and
by
combination
becomming
greater
,
they
make
up
five
branches
.
These
about
the
middle
of
the
hollow
part
,
yet
towards
the
back
joyning
together
make
up
one
root
,
which
at
the
last
comming
out
of
the
liver
,
about
the
eminences
,
called
portae
,
fame
that
trunck
which
is
called
Vena
portae
.
This
trunck
parting
a
Its
branches
.
little
from
the
liver
before
it
bee
severed
into
branches
,
it
putteth
forth
two
twigs
,
the
one
being
small
,
and
springing
from
the
upper
and
fore
part
of
the
trunck
,
as
soone
as
it
parteth
from
the
liver
,
is
inserted
into
cystis
fellis
,
about
the
neck
of
it
,
and
spr●ed
by
innumerable
twigs
,
thorow
the
externall
coat
of
it
.
Vesalius
affirmeth
that
there
bee
two
of
these
twigs
,
from
whence
some
call
them
cysticae
gemellae
:
But
this
is
a
matter
of
no
great
moment
.
This
twig
may
be
called
surculus
cysticus
,
or
Vesicalis
.
The
second
twig
is
bigger
,
but
lower
.
This
springeth
from
this
same
forepart
,
yet
towards
the
right
side
,
and
is
inserted
into
the
bottome
of
the
stomacke
:
from
hence
it
sendeth
many
sprigs
toward
the
hinder
part
of
it
towards
the
backe
.
It
may
be
called
pistaricus
more
properly
than
gastricus
,
seeing
there
are
other
branches
which
are
called
gastrici
.
Having
sent
forth
these
2
twigs
,
the
trunke
passeth
down
,
and
bending
still
a
little
towards
the
left
side
,
it
is
parted
into
two
remarkable
branches
;
whereof
the
one
is
called
sinister
or
the
left
,
seated
above
the
right
,
but
lesser
:
the
other
is
dexter
,
or
the
right
,
lower
than
the
left
,
yet
larger
:
the
left
is
bestowed
upon
the
stomacke
,
the
omentum
,
a
part
of
colon
and
the
splene
:
the
right
is
spred
through
the
guts
and
the
mesenterium
:
the
left
is
called
vena
splenica
,
but
the
right
vena
mesenterica
.
The
vena
splenica
hath
Branches
of
Vena
splenica
.
two
branches
before
it
come
to
the
splene
,
the
superiour
and
the
inferiour
.
The
superiour
is
called
gastricus
or
ventricularis
.
This
is
bestowed
upon
the
stomacke
,
the
middle
twig
conspassing
the
left
part
of
the
orifice
of
the
stomacke
like
a
garland
,
is
called
coronaria
:
from
the
lower
branch
two
twigs
doe
spring
the
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
this
doth
send
other
twigs
to
the
right
side
of
the
lower
membrane
of
the
omentum
,
and
to
the
colon
annexed
to
it
.
This
is
called
epiplois
,
or
omentalus
dextra
:
the
other
is
spent
upon
the
lower
membrane
of
the
omentum
which
tieth
the
colon
to
the
backe
,
and
upon
that
part
of
the
colon
,
it
is
called
epiplois
,
or
omentalis
postica
:
when
the
ramus
splenicus
hath
approched
to
the
splene
,
it
doth
send
our
two
other
twigs
,
the
uppermost
and
the
lowermost
:
from
the
uppermost
vas
breve
springeth
which
is
implanted
in
the
left
part
of
the
bottome
of
the
stomacke
commonly
:
from
the
lowermost
two
twigs
issue
.
The
first
is
called
gastrve
piplois
sinistra
,
this
comming
from
the
lower
part
of
the
splene
towards
the
right
side
,
is
bestowed
upon
the
left
part
of
the
bottome
of
the
stomacke
,
and
the
upper
and
left
part
of
the
omentum
.
The
second
springeth
most
commonly
from
ramus
splenicus
,
but
seldome
from
the
splene
;
and
passing
along
according
to
the
length
of
the
intestinum
rectum
,
it
is
inserted
into
the
anus
by
many
twigs
.
This
is
called
Haemorrhoidalis
interna
,
as
that
which
springeth
from
the
vena
cava
is
called
baemorrhodalis
externa
.
Now
followeth
vena
.
Vena
mesenterica
Mesenterica
,
or
the
right
branch
of
vena
fortae
;
before
it
bee
divided
into
branches
,
it
sendeth
forth
two
twigs
.
The
first
is
called
Gastroepiplois
sinistra
,
this
is
bestowed
upon
the
right
part
of
the
bottom
of
the
stomacke
,
and
the
upper
membrane
of
the
caule
.
The
second
is
called
Intestinalis
,
or
duodena
:
It
is
inserted
into
the
middle
of
the
duodenum
,
and
the
beginning
of
the
jejunum
,
and
passeth
accordin
gtohe
length
of
them
.
This
branch
as
soon
as
it
passeth
from
the
backe
,
it
entereth
into
the
mesenterium
,
and
passing
betweene
the
membranes
of
it
,
sendeth
forth
those
mesaraicall
veins
,
which
send
nourishment
to
the
inward
parts
.
It
is
divided
into
two
branches
,
to
wit
,
Mesenterica
dextra
,
&
sinistra
:
Mesenterica
dextra
,
placed
in
the
right
side
,
sendeth
a
number
of
branches
to
feed
the
jejunumcaecū
,
and
the
right
part
of
the
colon
,
which
is
next
to
the
kidney
and
liver
.
It
hath
foureteen
remarkable
branches
,
but
innumerable
smal
twigs
.
One
thing
is
to
be
noted
,
that
the
greater
branches
are
supported
by
the
greater
glandules
,
and
the
smaller
by
the
smaller
glandules
.
Mesenterica
sinistra
passeth
through
the
middle
of
the
mesenterium
,
&
that
part
of
colon
which
passeth
from
the
left
part
of
the
stomack
,
to
the
intestinum
rectum
.
The
chiefe
use
of
the
The
uses
of
it
.
vena
portae
is
to
nourish
the
parts
which
are
appointed
for
nutrition
with
thicke
and
feculent
blood
:
It
ought
to
bee
thicke
,
that
it
might
be
the
hotter
;
for
heat
in
a
thicke
body
is
more
powerfull
.
The
second
use
is
to
further
the
sanguification
of
the
liver
.
CAP.
XIV
.
Of
the
Vena
cava
,
dispersed
within
the
trunk
of
the
body
.
WIthin
the
trunck
of
the
body
,
the
vena
cava
hath
two
trunkes
;
one
called
ascendens
or
going
up
,
the
other
descendens
or
marching
downe
.
The
ascendens
passing
through
the
nerves
part
of
the
Diaphragma
,
it
marcheth
upward
undicided
,
until
it
come
to
the
jugulum
:
yet
by
the
way
from
its
sides
it
sendeth
two
twigs
.
The
first
is
Phrenica
,
1
this
is
inserted
into
the
midrife
and
heart
,
from
●ence
springeth
the
coronaria
vena
which
compasseth
the
basis
of
the
heart
as
a
garland
.
The
second
is
vena
sine
2
pari
,
so
called
,
because
it
hath
not
a
fellow
in
the
left
side
as
other
veins
have
.
It
doth
spring
about
the
fift
vertebra
of
the
brest
from
the
hinder
part
of
the
vena
cava
in
the
right
side
.
This
going
downe
,
it
marcheth
towards
the
Spina
:
when
it
is
come
The
branches
of
vena
sine
pari
.
to
the
eighth
or
ninth
rib
above
the
Spina
,
it
is
divided
into
two
branches
,
to
wit
,
the
right
and
the
left
;
the
left
is
inserted
most
commonly
in
the
middle
of
the
left
emulgent
veine
.
By
this
branch
blood
,
on
watrish
or
purulent
matter
may
bee
discharged
by
urine
;
the
right
twig
is
implanted
either
into
the
trunke
of
the
cava
,
or
into
prims
lumbaris
.
This
being
done
,
the
vena
cava
ascendeth
up
to
the
jugulum
being
strengthened
by
the
mediastinum
and
the
glandulous
body
called
thymus
.
Here
the
vena
cava
is
divided
into
two
remarkable
branches
,
from
whence
those
veins
spring
which
are
sent
to
the
head
,
to
the
armes
,
and
some
muscules
of
the
abdomen
.
One
passeth
to
the
right
side
,
the
other
to
the
left
;
the
one
is
called
subclavius
,
because
it
marcheth
under
the
cannel
bone
with
in
:
The
other
is
called
The
branches
of
ramus
subclavius
.
axillaris
when
it
is
come
to
the
arme
pit
,
from
the
upper
part
of
the
ramus
subclavius
two
remarkable
branches
proceed
:
the
internall
and
externall
jugular
,
in
man
the
internall
is
biggest
,
but
in
beasts
the
externall
.
1
The
internall
jugular
commeth
out
about
the
articulation
of
the
cannell
bone
with
the
sternum
;
then
it
joyneth
it selfe
with
the
soporall
arterie
,
and
the
recurrent
nerve
,
and
with
it
hinder
and
greatest
branch
accompanied
with
the
soporall
arterie
,
it
entereth
with
the
cranium
at
the
hole
of
the
occiput
,
by
the
which
the
sixth
paire
of
nerves
commenth
downe
,
it
entreth
into
the
first
and
second
sinus
of
the
dura
mater
.
The
externall
jugular
2
mounteth
up
to
the
eare
under
the
skin
,
and
the
quadrat
muscule
which
pulleth
down
the
cheek
alongst
the
necke
:
from
this
branch
spring
the
veins
which
are
opened
under
the
tongue
.
From
the
lower
part
of
ramus
subclavius
,
spring
foure
branches
.
Sprigges
springing
from
the
lower
part
of
ramus
subclavius
.
The
first
,
Intercostalis
superior
,
one
on
each
side
;
it
is
small
,
and
commeth
out
about
the
root
of
the
bifurcation
:
then
passing
downe
by
the
roots
of
two
ribs
,
it
bestowed
twigs
upon
the
distances
of
these
two
ribs
.
The
second
is
Mammaria
,
this
marcheth
forwards
towards
the
upper
part
of
the
brest
bone
:
then
it
goeth
downe
by
the
sides
of
it
,
and
when
it
is
come
to
cartilage
mucronata
about
the
sides
of
it
,
it
commeth
out
:
from
thence
it
passeth
straight
waies
under
the
right
muscule
to
the
navell
,
where
by
an
anastomasis
it
is
joyned
with
the
spigastrica
ascendens
:
from
hence
commeth
that
great
consent
betweene
the
matrix
and
paps
.
The
third
is
Mediastina
,
because
it
is
bestowed
upon
the
mediastinum
,
together
with
the
left
nerve
of
the
diaphragma
,
according
to
its
length
.
The
fourth
is
Cervicalis
,
or
Vertebralis
.
This
passing
thorow
the
holes
of
the
transverse
processes
of
the
vertebrae
of
the
neck
,
is
bestowed
upon
the
muscles
of
the
neck
which
are
next
to
the
vertebrae
.
CAP.
XV.
Of
the
Gall.
THe
Gall
,
called
in
Latine
Vesicabiliaria
The
description
of
it
.
or
Folliculus
sellis
,
is
a
dissimilary
part
,
in
figure
representing
a
peare
,
hollow
,
and
appointed
to
receive
the
thin
yellow
choler
.
It
is
about
two
inches
It
s
bignesse
.
in
length
.
By
its
upper
part
it
is
It
s
connexion
.
tied
to
the
liver
,
which
doth
afford
it
a
hollownesse
to
receive
it
;
but
the
lower
part
,
which
hangeth
without
the
liver
,
it
resteth
upon
the
right
side
of
the
stomack
,
and
the
Colon
,
and
doth
often
die
them
both
yellow
.
It
hath
two
membranes
,
Its
membranes
.
the
one
common
,
which
is
thin
and
exteriour
,
without
fibres
.
This
springing
from
the
membrane
of
the
liver
,
it
onely
covereth
that
part
which
hangeth
without
the
liver
;
The
other
membrane
is
proper
.
This
is
thick
and
strong
,
and
hath
three
The
fibres
of
the
proper
membrane
.
sorts
of
fibres
,
the
outtermost
are
transverse
,
the
middlemost
oblique
,
and
the
inner
most
straight
.
This
membrane
is
larder
and
thicker
in
the
necke
;
but
thinner
in
the
bottom
.
Within
it
hath
a
mucous
substance
,
engendered
of
the
excrements
of
the
third
concoction
of
the
membrane
,
to
withstand
the
acrimony
of
the
choler
.
It
hath
two
parts
,
the
The
parts
of
it
.
neck
,
and
the
bottom
.
The
necke
is
harder
than
the
bottom
,
and
higher
in
situation
.
It
from
the
bottome
by
degrees
growing
narrower
and
narrower
,
at
last
endeth
in
the
ductus
communis
,
or
the
common
passage
of
the
choler
,
to
the
beginning
of
the
jejunum
.
This
elongation
of
the
neck
of
the
vesicula
fellea
,
is
called
meatus
cysticus
,
because
it
springeth
from
the
cystis
.
The
choler
is
caried
How
the
choler
is
caried
to
the
gall
.
to
the
neck
of
the
cystis
,
by
many
small
veins
neere
to
the
roots
of
the
vena
portae
about
the
midst
of
them
,
and
is
discharged
into
the
cavity
of
it
about
the
upper
part
.
The
meatus
cysticus
Its
values
.
hath
three
values
looking
from
without
inwards
to
hinder
the
recourse
of
the
choler
to
the
liver
.
The
other
passage
Meatus
hepaticus
.
which
carieth
the
thick
and
corrupt
choler
,
as
that
which
is
called
vitellina
,
aeruginosa
,
porracea
,
&c.
is
called
meatus
hepaticus
;
because
it
passeth
straightway
from
the
liver
to
the
ductus
communis
.
This
passage
hath
no
What
beasts
have
this
passage
only
.
values
,
both
these
discharge
their
choler
by
the
common
passage
into
the
beginning
of
the
jejunum
,
when
the
small
guts
are
discharged
of
the
chylus
.
Beasts
which
want
the
vesica
fellea
,
have
this
meatus
hepaticus
,
as
Harts
,
Hynds
,
and
fallow
Deere
,
and
those
which
have
a
whole
hoofe
.
The
meatus
hepaticus
passeth
thorow
the
roots
of
the
vena
cava
,
by
innumerable
branches
,
which
being
gathered
together
become
one
branch
and
being
united
with
the
meatus
cyslicus
make
up
the
communis
ductus
,
which
is
inserted
into
the
beginning
of
the
jejunum
obliquely
betweene
the
two
membbranes
of
the
intestine
about
the
distance
of
two
inches
before
it
perforat
the
second
membrane
.
The
vesica
fellea
hath
for
nourishment
called
cysticae
gemellae
.
For
life
it
hath
sprigs
Its
vessels
.
of
arteries
proceeding
from
the
Caeliaca
.
To
afford
sense
it
hath
a
smal
threed
like
a
sprig
of
a
sinew
from
the
sixth
paire
.
Many
times
stones
are
Of
the
stones
in
it
.
found
in
it
,
but
they
being
lighter
than
those
of
the
bladder
,
swimme
above
the
water
.
The
use
of
these
two
The
use
of
the
passages
.
passages
,
is
to
draw
all
superfluous
choler
from
the
chylus
,
and
to
turne
it
into
the
guts
,
where
it
affordeth
benefits
to
nature
:
For
first
by
its
sharpnesse
The
uses
of
the
choler
.
it
moveth
the
intestines
to
turne
out
the
terrestriall
excrements
in
due
season
.
2
Secondly
,
by
reason
of
its
thinnesse
it
doth
cut
and
cleanse
the
small
guts
of
fleame
,
which
there
is
plentifully
bred
.
3
Thirdly
,
by
reason
of
its
drinesse
it
hindreth
the
increase
of
putrifaction
.
4
Fourthly
,
it
furthereth
concoction
in
the
intestines
by
increasing
their
heat
:
neverthelesse
,
naturally
there
can
bee
no
passage
to
carry
Why
choler
is
not
carried
to
the
stomacke
.
choler
to
the
bottome
of
the
stomacke
.
1
For
first
,
by
reason
of
its
acrimonie
it
would
corrode
it
.
Secondly
,
it
would
2
cause
the
crude
nourishment
to
passe
into
the
duodenum
.
Thirdly
,
it
would
procure
perpetuall
vomiting
.
3
If
it
fall
out
that
choler
be
carried
to
the
bottome
of
the
stomack
by
any
passage
than
this
,
the
party
vomiteth
choler
,
and
is
termed
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
but
if
it
be
inserted
into
the
end
of
the
jejunum
,
then
bilious
dejections
follow
:
and
such
a
one
is
termed
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
One
thing
I
would
A
note
.
have
you
observe
;
that
the
porus
biliarius
passeth
by
a
straight
course
to
the
ductus
communis
,
and
not
to
the
vesicula
fellea
,
which
thus
you
may
shew
:
put
a
cathaeter
into
the
necke
of
this
passage
neere
the
liver
,
the
guts
will
be
blowne
up
,
and
not
the
vesicula
.
Againe
,
put
the
cashaeter
into
the
common
passage
,
and
both
the
cystu
fellis
,
and
the
meatus
chelidochus
will
be
blowne
up
.
If
you
would
finde
How
the
values
are
found
out
.
out
the
three
values
of
the
vesicula
fellea
,
presse
the
choller
with
your
fingers
from
the
bottome
towards
the
neck
:
whre
you
find
the
choler
to
stay
,
there
the
values
are
.
CAP
XVI
.
Of
the
Spleene
.
THe
Spleene
or
Milt
in
English
,
in
Greek
is
called
Splen
,
and
Lien
in
Latine
.
The
substance
of
it
is
flaggie
,
It
s
substance
.
loose
,
and
spungious
,
net-like
,
which
is
the
cause
that
it
may
imbibe
much
superfluitie
,
and
so
become
exceedingly
swelled
.
This
substance
is
covered
It
s
membrane
.
with
a
membrane
borrowed
from
the
peritoneum
,
which
is
inserted
first
into
the
straight
line
of
the
milt
,
and
then
covereth
the
whole
Spleene
:
It
is
thicker
than
that
of
the
liver
.
First
,
because
it
hath
a
looser
substance
.
Secondly
,
because
it
hath
more
arteries
which
require
a
strong
membrance
to
defend
them
.
The
staight
line
is
in
the
hollow
part
,
where
the
vessels
of
the
Spleen
doe
enter
into
it
.
In
Infants
new
borne
Why
it
is
red
in
Infants
.
it
is
of
a
red
colour
,
because
they
have
been
fed
with
elaborate
blood
:
but
in
those
of
a
ripe
age
it
is
somewhat
blackish
,
being
boyled
,
it
representeth
clareth
wine
.
In
man
it
is
bigger
,
thicker
,
and
heavier
,
than
in
beasts
;
for
it
is
six
inches
in
length
,
three
in
breadth
,
and
one
in
thicknesse
;
yet
according
to
Aristotle
,
3.
histor.
animal.
16.
a
convenient
little
one
is
better
than
a
big
one
.
In
figure
it
is
somewhat
It
s
figure
.
It
s
seat
.
long
like
an
Oxestongue
,
It
is
seated
in
the
left
hypochondrium
:
So
Hippocrat
.
6.
Epidem
.
calleth
it
the
left
liver
,
and
Aristot
.
3.
part
.
animal.
7.
the
bastard
liver
,
but
is
seated
somewhat
lower
,
because
it
was
to
draw
the
terrestriall
part
of
the
Chylus
,
before
it
come
to
the
liver
by
ramus
splenicus
,
that
the
blood
may
be
made
thinner
,
and
purer
,
for
such
blood
causeth
men
to
be
wiser
.
2.
de
part
.
anim
.
2.
It
is
all
couched
within
and
under
the
short
ribs
;
so
that
in
healthful
persons
it
cannot
be
felt
;
onely
if
it
be
inflamed
,
a
pulsation
may
be
felt
.
It
is
tied
to
five
parts
,
It
s
connexion
.
to
the
midrife
and
left
kidney
by
small
membranes
,
by
it
hollow
part
which
giveth
way
to
the
stomacke
being
distended
to
the
upper
membrane
of
the
omentum
,
and
to
the
stomacke
by
vas
breve
.
In
its
arched
part
it
is
tied
to
the
back
,
so
that
dints
remain
in
it
by
the
impression
of
the
ribs
.
It
hath
veins
for
nourishment
from
ramus
splenicus
;
Its
vessels
.
for
life
it
hath
arteries
from
ramus
caeliacus
sinister
:
but
five
times
more
than
veins
;
for
great
heat
is
required
for
the
elaboration
of
thicke
blood
.
These
vessels
enter
into
the
spleen
where
the
straight
line
is
in
the
hollow
side
.
They
joyne
often
by
anastomoses
.
The
arteries
besides
life
afford
unto
the
The
uses
of
the
arteries
of
the
spleene
.
spleen
two
benefits
.
1
First
,
they
increase
the
naturall
heat
of
it
,
that
it
may
the
better
concoct
the
grosser
part
of
the
Chylus
which
is
sent
unto
it
by
the
ramus
splenicus
.
Secondly
,
they
further
the
expulsive
facultie
of
it
.
Now
the
spleene
sendeth
By
what
waies
the
spleen
sendeth
it
superfluities
to
the
kidnyes
.
its
superfluities
to
the
kidneys
by
two
wayes
.
First
,
by
returning
of
1
them
by
ramus
splenicus
,
to
the
vena
portae
,
and
from
thence
to
vena
cava
,
from
whence
they
are
sent
to
the
emulgent
veins
.
Secondly
,
by
a
shorter
2
passage
they
are
sent
from
arteria
caeliaca
to
the
aorta
,
and
from
thence
to
the
kidnyes
by
the
emulgent
arteries
.
Last
of
all
,
it
hath
small
twigges
of
nerves
from
the
sixt
pair
,
which
are
bestowed
upon
the
investing
membrane
,
but
are
not
communicate
to
the
substance
:
wherefore
it
must
bee
but
of
a
small
and
dull
feeling
:
so
that
the
pains
which
sundry
ascribe
to
the
spleene
,
are
to
bee
referred
to
the
adjacent
parts
.
The
use
of
the
spleen
,
as
also
of
the
liver
,
The
use
of
the
spleene
.
is
to
further
the
elaboration
and
concoction
of
the
Chylus
:
for
it
is
a
bastard
liver
according
to
Arist.
3.
de
Hijtor
.
animal.
7.
The
sanguification
of
How
the
sanguification
of
the
spleene
differeth
from
that
of
the
liver
.
the
spleen
differeth
in
two
points
,
from
that
of
the
liver
.
First
,
in
the
materiall
1
cause
,
for
the
spleen
maketh
grosse
bloud
of
the
more
carthy
part
of
the
Chylus
;
but
the
liver
far
purer
of
the
thinner
and
more
benigne
part
of
the
Chylus
.
Secondly
,
it
differeth
in
the
finall
cause
:
for
2
the
liver
sanguifieth
to
afford
nourishment
both
to
the
vitall
and
animall
parts
,
but
the
spleene
only
to
maintaine
the
naturall
parts
,
and
not
all
of
them
neither
.
Nature
would
have
Why
the
naturall
parts
are
nourished
with
grosse
bloud
.
the
naturall
parts
to
bee
furnished
with
grosse
bloud
by
the
branches
of
vena
portae
,
partly
to
increase
their
heat
;
for
heat
in
a
thick
body
is
stronger
;
partly
to
afford
them
nourishment
answerable
to
their
substance
,
for
it
is
thick
.
CAP.
XVII
.
Of
the
kidnies
.
THe
kidny
is
called
Their
denomination
.
in
Latine
Ren
,
from
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
to
flow
:
because
the
serofity
of
the
bloud
doth
flow
thorow
the
kidnies
,
to
the
ureters
,
and
from
thence
to
the
bladder
.
They
are
in
number
Their
number
.
two
,
not
so
much
for
the
poysing
of
the
body
,
as
for
their
use
and
necessity
;
that
one
being
stopped
,
yet
the
cleansing
of
the
bloud
might
bee
performed
by
the
other
.
They
are
seated
in
the
Their
places
.
loynes
under
the
liver
and
spleen
,
and
rest
upon
the
muscles
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
which
move
the
th
eyght
about
their
heads
;
under
the
which
large
nerves
are
couched
.
Which
is
the
cause
that
a
big
stone
being
in
the
kidny
a
numnesse
is
felt
in
the
foot
of
that
side
;
the
muscle
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
being
pressed
down
by
it
.
They
lye
behind
the
guts
.
The
right
kidnie
hath
the
coecum
;
but
the
left
the
colon
above
it
.
In
man
the
right
kidnie
is
lowest
,
by
reason
of
the
greatnesse
of
the
liver
,
and
bigger
also
than
the
left
;
yet
it
is
not
so
fat
as
the
left
,
by
reason
of
the
vicinity
of
the
liver
,
whose
heat
hindereth
the
increase
of
fat
.
In
figure
they
resemble
Their
figure
the
asarum
leafe
or
kidnie
beane
,
towards
the
loynes
they
are
gibbous
,
but
hollow
towards
the
guts
.
As
for
their
connexion
,
Their
connexion
.
by
the
externall
fat
membrane
they
are
tied
to
the
diaphragma
,
and
the
loynes
:
By
the
emulgent
vessels
to
the
vena
cava
,
and
the
aorta
,
and
by
the
ureters
to
the
bladder
.
They
are
in
length
about
five
inches
,
Their
bignesse
.
in
breadth
three
,
and
in
thicknesse
one
;
yet
they
are
somewhat
broader
above
than
under
.
They
are
smooth
in
the
gibbous
part
,
but
unequall
in
the
hollow
part
,
to
let
in
and
out
some
vessels
.
The
parts
are
two
,
to
Their
parts
wit
,
the
externall
and
the
internall
;
The
externall
are
the
membranes
;
these
are
two
.
The
one
is
common
Their
membranes
.
and
externall
,
borrowed
from
the
peritonaeum
;
within
the
reduplication
of
which
,
the
whole
kidnie
is
lapped
;
and
therefore
it
is
called
renis
fascia
.
This
membrane
is
compassed
with
copious
fat
;
so
that
the
kidnie
seemeth
to
be
the
fattest
of
all
other
entrals
,
according
to
Aristotle
3.
Histor.
Animal
.
17.
Although
each
one
be
exceedingly
fat
;
yet
some
part
of
the
kidney
will
remaine
uncovered
about
the
middle
.
This
fat
about
the
kidnie
The
uses
of
the
fat
of
the
kidnies
.
hath
a
threefold
use
.
First
,
it
is
instead
of
a
pillow
.
Secondly
,
it
receiveth
as
a
sponge
the
excrements
.
Thirdly
,
it
furthereth
and
keepeth
in
the
heat
.
Before
you
deprive
the
kidnies
of
this
tunica
adiposa
with
your
nailes
,
about
the
upper
part
of
the
kidnie
you
are
to
observe
a
large
glandule
,
which
hath
a
sprig
from
the
emulgent
veine
and
artery
,
Renes
succenturiati
.
for
nourishment
about
the
middle
of
it
.
In
figure
it
representeth
Their
figure
.
a
halfe
moone
,
and
is
not
unlike
a
kidnie
;
from
whence
it
is
called
ren
succenturiatus
.
There
is
one
on
each
side
in
the
upper
part
of
the
kidnie
resting
upon
the
tunica
adiposa
.
It
is
strongly
tyed
to
Their
connexion
.
the
septum
transversum
.
The
substance
of
it
is
more
flaggy
than
that
of
the
kidnie
.
It
hath
nerves
from
Their
nerves
.
the
plexus
retiformis
,
or
net-like
texture
,
framed
of
the
twigs
of
nervus
costalis
,
and
stomachicus
.
It
seemeth
to
be
framed
,
partly
to
fill
up
the
vacuity
which
is
betweene
the
kidnies
and
the
diaphragma
:
partly
to
bee
a
pillow
to
the
stomack
,
in
the
place
about
the
emulgent
vein
and
artery
.
The
second
membrane
The
proper
membrane
of
the
kidnyes
.
is
that
which
is
internall
and
proper
.
This
springeth
from
the
common
coat
of
the
vessels
which
enter
into
the
kidnyes
;
for
as
soone
as
the
vessels
approach
to
the
kidny
they
leave
their
externall
coat
.
It
can
hardly
be
separate
from
the
substance
of
the
kidny
.
The
internall
parts
The
internall
parts
.
are
those
which
are
contained
within
the
proper
membrane
.
In
these
sundry
things
are
remarkable
.
First
,
the
colour
of
The
colour
of
them
.
the
kidny
,
which
is
very
red
.
Secondly
,
the
substance
Their
substance
.
of
the
kidny
,
which
is
thick
,
hard
,
and
compact
as
the
heart
almost
,
but
not
so
fibrous
.
Thirdly
,
the
dispersion
The
emulgent
vessels
.
of
the
emulgent
vessels
throughout
it
;
first
they
enter
by
paires
into
the
hollow
part
of
the
kidny
.
Then
each
branch
is
divided
into
foure
or
five
lesser
branches
,
and
these
againe
into
lesser
,
untill
at
the
last
they
become
capillar
.
These
being
spred
sundrv
wayes
thorow
the
substance
of
the
kidny
,
towards
the
gibbous
part
at
last
they
end
at
the
tops
of
the
Carunculae
papillares
,
or
teat
like
fleshy
substances
,
into
the
which
they
poure
the
serosity
of
the
bloud
,
that
it
may
passe
thorow
the
tubuli
or
water
pipes
,
to
the
infundibulum
.
The
fourth
is
that
which
is
called
pelvis
or
infundibulum
,
the
tunnel
,
which
is
nothing
else
but
the
ample
cavity
of
the
vreter
within
the
kidnie
.
Fifthly
,
the
tibuli
or
fistulae
vreterum
,
the
water
pipes
of
the
vreters
offer
themselves
which
are
most
commonly
in
number
ten
;
foure
in
each
end
,
two
being
still
joyned
together
,
and
two
in
the
middle
according
to
the
number
of
the
carunulae
papillares
.
These
are
placed
in
the
arched
part
of
the
infundibulum
.
Now
the
ends
of
the
pipes
about
the
infundibulum
are
called
cribrum
or
the
sive
.
These
water
pipes
proceeding
from
the
infundibulum
become
a
little
wider
,
and
end
in
the
gibbous
part
of
the
kidny
,
with
a
wide
round
mouth
receiving
the
carunculae
papillares
,
by
the
which
their
mouths
are
stopped
,
and
the
watrishnesse
of
the
blood
issueth
out
into
them
,
as
milk
out
of
the
teats
.
Sixthly
,
Carunculae
papillares
are
to
bee
considered
.
They
are
small
fleshy
bodies
,
somewhat
harder
than
the
substance
of
the
kidny
,
resembling
the
teats
of
womens
paps
,
from
whence
they
have
their
denomination
;
they
are
of
the
bignesse
of
a
pease
somewhat
broad
above
;
below
round
.
If
you
divide
them
thorow
the
middle
,
you
shall
perceive
a
smooth
haire-like
passage
from
the
top
to
the
end
.
They
are
in
number
answerable
to
the
number
of
the
tubuli
,
which
receive
them
.
To
find
out
these
parts
before
named
,
you
must
How
these
parts
are
to
be
found
out
.
divide
the
kidney
in
the
hollow
part
,
putting
a
thick
probe
into
the
pelvis
.
Incision
being
made
to
the
infundibulum
,
first
you
shall
see
the
tubuli
,
then
the
Carunculae
papillares
.
The
kidnies
have
two
sorts
of
veins
.
Their
vessels
.
First
,
the
two
called
adiposae
,
because
they
are
spred
through
the
tunica
adiposa
,
and
are
covered
with
the
fat
,
and
afford
matter
for
the
fat
.
The
right
of
these
springeth
from
the
emulgent
vein
;
but
the
left
from
the
vena
cava
.
Secondly
,
the
two
emulgentes
,
so
called
from
their
action
.
These
are
large
,
and
spring
from
the
trunck
of
the
vena
cava
descending
between
the
first
and
second
vertebra
of
the
loynes
.
These
being
carried
transversly
are
implanted
into
the
hollow
part
of
the
kidnies
,
being
divided
into
two
branches
.
The
left
is
somewhat
higher
,
as
also
the
left
kidney
;
but
the
right
is
somewhat
longer
.
It
hath
a
value
to
hinder
the
return
of
the
serosity
to
the
trunk
of
the
cava
.
Fallopius
was
of
this
How
matters
gathered
in
the
cavity
of
the
brest
are
discharged
into
the
ureters
.
mind
,
that
a
branch
of
a
veine
passeth
from
the
vena
sine
pari
to
the
left
kidny
,
by
the
which
quitiour
and
water
may
be
discharged
by
urine
.
But
it
is
more
probable
,
that
these
maters
are
first
drawn
in
into
the
trunck
of
the
aorta
,
by
its
inconspicuous
pores
,
and
from
thence
sent
to
the
kidnyes
,
by
the
emulgent
arteries
.
These
are
in
number
The
arteries
2.
one
in
each
side
,
which
accompany
the
veins
,
to
the
kidny
slope
wayes
.
Whither
when
they
are
come
,
they
are
divided
in
two
branches
,
whereof
the
one
is
implanted
in
the
lower
,
the
other
in
the
upper
part
of
the
hollow
part
of
the
kidny
.
The
nerves
on
each
The
nerves
side
spring
either
from
ramus
stomachicus
,
and
that
is
but
one
and
smal
,
and
is
spred
thorow
the
proper
coat
;
from
hence
ariseth
the
consent
betweene
the
kidnyes
and
the
stomack
.
So
that
vomiting
is
troublesome
in
nephriticall
diseases
.
One
may
think
that
nature
hath
afforded
arteries
larger
than
was
requisit
to
afford
life
to
so
small
bodies
,
as
the
kidnies
are
:
But
it
was
fit
so
to
bee
,
for
the
passages
were
to
bee
parent
,
which
were
to
discharge
the
heart
and
arteries
of
serosity
.
The
artery
lyeth
between
The
place
of
the
arterie
.
the
veine
and
the
vreter
;
partly
to
hasten
the
bloud
to
the
kidney
;
partly
speedily
to
discharge
the
watrishnesse
.
The
veins
and
arteries
are
not
joyned
with
the
water
pipes
:
for
if
you
put
a
catheter
into
the
ureter
by
blowing
the
vessel
will
not
swell
.
CAP.
XVIII
.
Of
the
vreters
.
THe
ureters
,
in
Latine
meatus
urinarii
,
are
called
in
Greeke
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
either
from
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
to
pisse
,
or
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
because
they
keepe
the
urine
.
There
is
one
in
each
Their
number
.
side
.
They
are
white
vessels
,
Their
substance
.
like
to
veines
,
yet
they
are
whiter
,
thicker
,
and
more
nervous
.
They
reach
from
the
kidny
to
the
bladder
.
They
have
two
coats
,
Their
coats
.
the
one
common
from
the
peritonaeum
,
the
other
proper
,
from
the
externall
or
common
coat
,
it
hath
capillar
veins
and
arteries
.
It
hath
few
oblique
Its
fibres
.
fibres
,
but
most
straight
.
It
springeth
from
the
bladder
;
for
it
cannot
be
severed
from
it
easily
,
as
from
the
kidnyes
.
Yet
it
differeth
from
How
the
ureter
differeth
from
the
bladder
.
the
bladder
in
two
things
.
First
,
in
that
the
bladder
hath
three
coats
,
but
it
only
two
.
Secondly
,
the
bladder
hath
all
sorts
of
fibres
,
but
the
ureter
hath
most
straight
,
few
oblique
.
They
are
inserted
in
the
back
and
lower
part
of
the
bladder
not
farre
from
the
muscle
sphincter
,
between
the
two
proper
coats
of
it
about
the
length
of
an
inch
.
This
insertion
is
oblique
Why
the
insertion
is
oblique
.
to
hinder
the
regurgitation
of
the
urin
,
when
the
bladder
is
either
compressed
,
or
distended
with
urine
.
Although
the
ureter
doth
not
ordinarily
exceed
in
compasse
a
barley
corne
;
yet
when
stones
doe
passe
,
it
becommeth
sometimes
as
large
as
a
gut
.
CAP.
XIX
.
Of
the
bladder
.
THe
bladder
is
seated
It
s
place
.
in
the
hypogastrium
,
in
the
place
called
pelvis
.
Of
substance
it
is
It
s
substance
membranous
:
becanse
it
was
to
admit
large
stretching
.
The
membranes
of
it
Its
membranes
.
are
three
.
The
first
is
from
the
paeritonaeum
:
for
it
is
lapped
within
the
reduplication
of
it
.
The
second
is
thicker
and
indued
with
many
straight
fibres
,
which
Aqua
pendens
will
have
to
bee
a
muscle
serving
for
the
compression
of
the
bladder
,
as
the
sphincter
serveth
for
constriction
.
The
third
and
innermost
is
white
&
bright
,
of
exquisit
sense
,
as
they
can
witnesse
who
are
troubled
with
the
stone
.
It
hath
all
sorts
of
Its
fibres
.
fibres
.
Within
it
is
covered
with
a
mucous
crust
,
It
s
crust
.
an
excrement
of
the
third
concoction
of
the
bladder
.
This
doth
mitigate
the
acrimony
of
the
Urine
.
It
is
perforat
in
three
It
s
perforation
.
parts
,
to
wit
,
in
the
sides
where
the
ureters
are
to
let
in
the
urine
,
and
before
to
let
out
the
urine
.
The
bladder
hath
two
Its
parts
.
parts
,
to
wit
,
the
bottom
and
the
neck
.
Both
these
in
figure
It
s
figure
.
represent
a
peare
.
The
bottome
is
upholden
How
it
is
upholden
.
by
the
navell
:
First
,
in
the
middle
by
the
ligament
called
vrachus
,
which
is
the
cause
sometimes
that
they
who
have
a
great
stone
in
the
bladder
,
complaine
of
great
paine
about
the
navell
.
Secondly
,
by
the
umbilicall
arteries
dryed
laterally
.
If
the
bladder
were
Why
mans
bladder
is
snspended
.
not
suspended
,
a
man
going
straight
up
the
bottome
of
the
bladder
would
compresse
the
neck
,
and
cause
difficulty
in
making
of
water
.
In
man
it
lyeth
betweene
It
s
heat
in
man
and
woman
.
the
os
pubis
and
the
intestinum
rectum
.
In
women
between
the
neck
of
the
matrix
and
os
pubis
.
The
bladder
of
man
differeth
from
the
bladder
How
the
bladdes
of
man
differeth
from
the
bladder
of
beasts
.
of
beasts
in
two
things
.
First
,
the
bladder
in
man
is
couched
within
the
redoplication
of
the
peritonaeum
,
but
in
beasts
it
is
loose
,
and
onely
is
tied
to
the
intestinum
rectum
.
Secondly
,
the
bladder
of
man
hath
fat
without
;
but
the
bladder
of
beasts
none
.
In
it
stones
are
Why
stones
are
ingendered
in
it
.
promptly
engendered
,
because
the
heat
of
it
is
compact
:
So
red
hot
iron
burneth
worse
than
the
flame
of
fire
.
There
is
a
great
consent
betweene
the
bladder
Why
there
is
a
consent
between
the
bladder
and
kidnies
and
kidnies
.
So
that
in
diseases
of
the
kidnies
,
difficulty
in
making
of
water
sometimes
happeneth
:
The
causes
of
this
consent
are
two
.
First
,
the
communion
of
office
,
for
both
serve
for
the
excretion
of
urine
.
Secondly
,
the
similitude
of
substance
;
for
both
the
inside
of
the
kidnies
,
and
the
bladder
are
membranous
.
One
thing
is
to
be
noted
,
An
observation
.
that
a
bladder
is
bestowed
onely
upon
such
creatures
as
have
bloudy
lungs
,
and
the
hotter
Why
the
bladder
in
man
is
big
.
the
lungs
are
the
bigger
the
bladder
is
.
So
man
according
to
his
stature
,
hath
of
all
living
creatures
the
biggest
bladder
.
According
to
Aristot.
lib.
1.
Histor.
Animal
.
Because
the
bladder
is
of
a
cold
temperature
;
therefore
in
deadly
diseases
of
it
,
sleepinesse
oppresseth
the
patient
,
according
to
Hippoc.
6.
epidem
.
In
the
neck
onely
the
The
muscle
sphincter
.
muscle
sphincter
doth
offer
it selfe
to
be
considered
:
whereof
read
in
the
doctrine
of
muscles
.
It
hath
veins
and
arteries
Its
vessels
.
called
Hypogastricae
,
implanted
on
every
side
of
the
neck
,
which
are
immediatly
divided
into
two
branches
;
wherof
the
one
is
bestowed
upon
the
bottome
;
but
the
other
upon
the
neck
.
It
hath
remarkable
Its
nerves
.
nerves
;
partly
from
those
of
the
sixth
conjugation
,
which
passe
by
the
roots
of
the
ribs
,
partly
from
those
which
spring
last
from
os
sacrum
.
The
use
of
the
bladder
is
to
containe
the
urine
,
like
a
chamber
pot
,
untill
the
time
of
excretion
come
when
the
bladder
is
full
.
CAP.
XX.
Of
the
generation
of
blood
.
FIrst
of
all
every
nourishment
receiveth
a
preparation
in
the
mouth
.
If
it
be
solid
,
it
is
chewed
by
the
teeth
,
from
the
mouth
by
swallowing
,
it
is
turned
to
stomack
.
It
being
embraced
How
the
Chylus
is
made
.
by
the
stomack
,
and
kept
for
a
while
,
is
turned
into
chylus
,
partly
by
the
specricall
heat
of
the
stomack
it selfe
;
partly
by
the
heat
of
the
adjacent
parts
,
but
chiefly
of
the
liver
,
spleen
,
and
caull
.
The
chylus
being
made
light
by
concoction
it
riseth
up
,
and
passeth
to
the
pylorus
,
and
procureth
the
opening
of
it
.
This
being
opened
the
stomack
by
its
transverse
fibres
,
thrusteth
the
chylus
into
duodedum
.
From
hence
it
passeth
more
and
more
downwards
by
degrees
.
The
wrinkles
of
the
small
guts
hinder
the
suddaine
passage
of
it
,
to
procure
an
equall
concoction
of
all
the
parts
of
it
.
In
the
meane
time
the
venae
lacteae
draw
from
the
small
guts
,
whatsoever
is
alimentary
of
the
chylus
.
While
the
chylus
thus
passeth
to
the
liver
,
and
is
come
to
the
diverication
of
the
vena
portae
,
the
spleen
by
a
naturall
faculty
by
the
ramus
splenicus
,
draweth
to
it selfe
the
thickest
and
most
terrestriall
part
,
yet
the
purest
onely
may
come
to
the
liver
.
When
the
chylus
is
come
to
the
liver
,
the
choler
is
sent
either
by
meatus
cysticus
,
to
the
gall
,
or
to
the
jejunum
by
meatus
hepaticus
.
The
bloud
being
perfected
,
the
grosser
part
is
carried
by
the
branches
of
the
vena
portae
,
and
the
splenicall
to
the
nourishment
of
the
parts
appointed
for
nutrition
;
but
the
purest
part
is
carried
to
all
other
parts
for
their
nutrition
;
and
because
much
watrishnesse
is
mingled
with
the
bloud
,
that
it
may
passe
without
difficulty
by
the
narrow
passages
of
inosculations
to
the
vena
cava
(
seeing
the
serosity
is
unapt
to
nourish
)
it
is
sent
by
the
emulgent
veins
and
arteries
to
the
kidnies
,
and
from
thence
by
the
ureters
to
the
bladder
.
CAP.
XXI
.
Of
vasa
praeparantia
in
Man
.
HItherto
wee
have
handled
the
parts
appointed
for
nutrition
:
Now
it
followeth
to
run
thorow
the
parts
ordained
for
generation
to
continue
man
kind
.
The
genitals
are
of
The
differences
of
the
genitals
.
two
sorts
;
of
the
male
,
and
female
,
and
so
it
was
requisit
for
procreation
;
for
this
action
requireth
an
agent
and
patient
:
seed
and
menstruall
bloud
.
The
first
is
the
palace
of
the
plasmatick
spirit
.
The
second
asfordeth
supply
of
matter
to
the
spirit
,
to
draw
out
the
admirable
frame
of
the
regions
and
parts
of
the
little
world
.
In
man
some
of
these
The
parts
of
the
genitals
in
man
.
parts
afford
matter
for
the
seed
,
to
wit
,
the
foure
vasa
praeparantia
:
some
elaborate
this
matter
,
the
corpus
voeri
coesum
:
some
make
the
seed
fruitfull
,
as
the
stones
;
some
carry
the
seed
back
againe
,
and
make
it
pure
,
as
those
which
are
called
vasa
deferentia
:
some
containe
the
seed
,
and
an
oleaginous
matter
,
as
the
vesiculae
seminalis
,
and
the
prostates
;
some
discharge
the
seed
into
the
matrix
:
This
is
done
by
the
penis
.
Vasa
praeparantia
,
Vasa
praeparantia
.
which
prepare
matter
for
the
seed
,
are
of
two
sorts
,
veins
and
arteries
.
The
veins
are
two
.
The
right
springeth
from
the
trunck
of
the
vena
cava
,
a
little
under
the
emulgent
.
The
left
proceedeth
from
the
emulgent
.
The
arteries
spring
The
arteries
.
from
the
trunck
of
the
aorta
;
these
vessels
being
a
little
distant
one
from
another
,
are
tied
together
by
a
thin
membrane
,
which
springeth
from
the
peritonaeum
,
and
meet
often
by
the
way
by
inosculation
.
These
vessels
are
greater
in
men
than
in
women
,
and
the
arteries
are
bigger
than
the
veins
:
because
much
heat
and
plenty
of
spirits
are
required
for
the
seed
.
They
enter
into
the
groyne
obliquely
carried
together
with
the
muscle
cremaster
,
betweene
the
two
coats
of
the
peritonaeum
.
In
curing
of
a
rupture
by
incision
,
if
the
muscle
cremaster
doe
fall
out
to
be
bound
by
the
ligature
,
spasmus
cynicus
ensueth
.
These
vessels
do
end
The
ending
of
the
vessels
.
about
the
beggining
of
the
testicles
,
and
from
hence
are
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
and
make
up
that
part
which
is
called
corpus
varicosum
,
paraslaca
,
&
plexus
pampiniformis
.
From
the
stones
to
it
many
small
fibres
passe
.
The
corpus
varicosum
is
Corpus
varicosum
.
framed
of
the
twisting
of
the
vasa
praeparantia
;
which
maketh
a
long
,
thick
,
glandulus
,
but
hard
welt
without
any
remarkable
cavity
,
which
passeth
to
the
bottome
of
the
stone
,
and
from
thence
to
the
vas
deferens
,
where
it
endeth
.
Here
the
venall
and
arteriall
bloud
being
elaborat
in
these
admirable
windings
,
is
further
prepared
,
a
quality
being
imparted
from
the
seminificall
faculty
of
the
stones
.
CAP
XXII
.
Of
the
stones
.
THe
stones
in
Latine
are
called
Testes
,
because
they
testifie
one
to
be
a
man
.
They
are
glandulous
Their
substance
.
bodies
,
flaggy
,
soft
,
and
white
,
without
any
cavity
,
full
of
small
veins
and
arteries
,
such
as
are
not
in
any
part
of
the
body
.
They
are
in
number
Their
number
.
two
,
and
therefore
in
Greeke
are
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
Their
figure
is
ovall
,
Their
figure
the
right
is
hotter
,
and
better
concocteth
the
seed
.
Wherefore
by
Hippocrat
.
it
is
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
a
begetter
of
the
male
.
The
left
stone
is
more
full
,
and
hath
a
bigger
veine
;
yet
the
seed
,
which
is
there
eleborat
,
is
more
watrish
and
colder
;
because
it
proceedeth
from
the
emulgent
,
and
is
called
of
Hippoc.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
because
it
begetteth
the
female
.
In
the
stones
there
are
to
bee
considered
their
coats
,
substance
,
and
use
.
Their
coats
are
foure
.
Their
coats
First
,
bursa
seroti
,
and
it
is
nothing
else
but
the
skin
covered
with
the
cuticula
:
And
because
it
cleaveth
firmly
to
the
Membrana
carnosa
under
it
,
so
that
they
seeme
to
make
but
one
coat
,
it
commeth
to
passe
that
in
cold
,
it
doth
contract
it selfe
,
and
becommeth
wrinckled
.
In
the
lower
part
it
The
line
.
hath
a
line
according
to
the
length
,
whereby
it
is
divided
into
the
right
and
left
side
;
this
line
is
called
sutura
,
or
a
seame
.
The
second
is
called
by
Rufus
,
dartos
,
because
it
may
easily
bee
flead
from
the
tunica
vaginalis
;
by
the
ancients
it
was
called
erithroides
:
because
it
appeareth
to
be
red
be
reason
of
the
fleshy
fibres
wherewith
it
is
enterlaced
.
This
ariseth
from
the
membrana
carnosa
;
which
here
is
more
thin
and
subtile
than
else
where
,
and
stored
with
veins
and
arteries
.
The
third
is
elythroides
or
vaginalis
:
because
it
containeth
the
stone
as
a
sheath
.
It
is
a
thick
and
strong
membrane
,
having
many
veins
.
In
the
outside
it
is
uneven
,
by
reason
of
the
fibres
,
by
the
which
it
is
tyed
to
the
dartos
;
but
in
the
inner
side
it
is
smooth
.
This
is
nothing
else
but
the
production
of
the
peritonaeum
.
The
fourth
is
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
the
nervous
mēorane
,
called
albuginea
form
its
colour
;
It
is
white
,
thick
,
and
strong
,
framed
of
the
externall
tunicle
of
the
vasa
praeparantia
.
It
is
immediatly
wrapped
in
the
stone
,
between
these
two
the
water
is
contained
in
Hernia
aquosa
.
The
substance
is
described
in
the
beginning
of
the
chapter
.
Each
stone
hath
one
muscle
called
cremaster
,
from
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
or
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
which
is
to
hold
up
;
because
it
pulleth
up
the
stone
in
the
act
of
generation
,
that
the
vesses
being
slacked
,
may
the
more
readily
voyd
the
seed
.
This
muscle
is
nothing
else
but
the
lower
part
of
the
oblique
muscle
,
ascending
neere
to
os
pubis
,
which
outwardly
wrapping
the
production
of
the
peritonaeum
,
is
caried
to
the
stone
.
These
muscles
in
sicknesse
and
old
age
become
flaggy
,
and
so
the
scrotum
relaxeth
it selfe
,
and
the
stones
hang
low
.
The
uses
of
the
stones
are
three
:
The
first
is
to
elaborate
the
seed
by
reason
of
the
seminificall
faculty
resident
in
the
parenchyma
of
the
stones
;
for
they
turne
the
bloud
,
which
is
brought
by
the
vasa
praeparantia
into
seed
,
for
the
most
part
;
the
rest
they
reserve
for
their
owne
nutrition
.
The
second
is
,
they
adde
heat
,
strength
and
courage
to
the
body
,
as
gelding
doth
manifest
;
by
the
which
all
these
are
empaired
.
Thirdly
,
they
receive
the
superfluous
humidity
of
the
seed
,
by
reason
of
their
glandulous
substance
.
CAP.
XXIII
.
Of
the
vessels
that
carry
the
seed
,
and
those
that
keepe
it
.
VAsa
deferentia
,
the
vessels
which
cary
the
seed
,
in
colour
they
are
white
,
in
substance
sinewy
,
having
an
obscure
hollownesse
;
from
hence
they
are
called
meatus
seminales
.
They
spring
from
the
lower
end
of
the
parastatae
.
These
mount
up
by
the
sides
of
the
Vasa
praeparantia
.
When
they
are
come
within
the
cavity
of
the
belly
,
they
turne
back
againe
,
and
passe
to
the
backside
of
the
bladder
:
betweene
which
and
the
intestinum
recta
they
passe
untill
about
the
neck
of
the
bladder
,
being
somewhat
severed
,
and
at
last
being
joyned
together
,
but
not
united
,
are
inserted
on
each
side
in
the
glandulous
bodies
called
prostatae
.
Before
they
come
thither
Vesiculae
seminales
.
they
are
joyned
to
the
Vesiculae
seminales
;
These
in
figure
represent
the
cels
of
a
pomegranat
or
hony
combe
.
These
containe
an
Their
substance
.
oyly
and
yellow
substance
;
for
they
draw
unto
themselves
,
that
which
is
fatty
in
the
seed
.
They
are
more
in
number
,
that
the
oleous
substance
should
not
forcibly
and
plentifully
be
powred
into
the
vrethra
;
but
should
gently
and
slowly
passe
from
one
unto
another
by
windings
,
and
at
last
be
powred
into
the
conduit
of
the
yard
by
a
hole
which
is
shut
up
with
a
fleshy
substance
,
partly
to
stay
the
involuntary
effusion
of
it
,
partly
to
hinder
the
regurgitation
of
it
.
It
being
powred
into
the
urethra
chiefly
in
the
time
of
carnall
copulation
,
doth
moysten
it
that
it
shrink
not
,
and
suffereth
not
it
to
be
offended
by
the
acrimony
of
the
seed
or
urine
.
The
Vasa
deferentia
passing
by
these
,
go
to
the
glandules
called
prostatae
,
by
the
which
they
are
compassed
.
When
they
are
come
to
The
use
of
the
caruncule
in
the
urethra
.
the
urethra
a
caruncule
as
a
value
is
set
before
the
orifice
of
each
of
them
:
partly
to
hinder
the
comming
of
the
urine
into
them
;
partly
to
hinder
the
involuntary
effusion
of
the
seed
.
Under
and
by
this
caruncule
The
holes
by
the
which
the
seed
passeth
to
the
urethra
.
on
each
side
there
are
three
holes
thorow
which
the
seed
passeth
into
the
urethra
.
These
holes
are
discerned
easily
in
a
gonorrhea
inveterat
;
although
not
so
easily
in
a
found
person
.
The
seed
doth
passe
thorow
these
inconspicuous
passages
,
as
quick
silver
thorow
lether
,
by
drops
.
The
seed
having
beene
made
subtill
and
spirituous
by
sublimation
thorow
the
vasa
deferentia
ascending
is
able
to
passe
thorow
in
conspicuous
passages
.
Prostatae
or
glandulae
seminales
,
Prostatae
.
are
glandulous
bodies
,
placed
between
the
necke
of
the
bladder
and
the
intestinum
rectum
.
Although
there
is
no
conspicuous
passage
,
by
the
which
the
seed
passeth
into
the
urethra
:
yet
the
thick
membrane
which
wrappeth
in
the
prostat
where
it
leaneth
upon
the
urethra
,
is
thinner
and
hath
many
pores
,
which
are
dilated
by
heat
in
the
act
of
generation
,
and
may
bee
seene
in
an
inveterate
gonorrhea
.
A
continuall
dilatation
of
these
procure
an
uncurable
gonorrhaae
.
The
sphincter
of
the
bladder
compasseth
these
glandules
.
In
drawing
of
a
stone
,
if
these
parts
bee
torne
,
the
party
becommeth
barren
.
The
distance
between
the
root
of
the
cod
and
the
podex
is
called
perinaeum
:
Perinaeum
.
because
it
is
still
moist
with
sweat
.
The
Pubes
,
scrotum
,
&
perinaeum
Why
these
parts
in
man
are
hairy
.
in
men
,
are
furnished
with
hayre
:
because
glandules
are
placed
there
,
which
receive
plenty
of
superfluous
moysture
:
a
part
whereof
they
send
to
the
skin
for
the
generation
of
hayre
.
Why
corrupt
seed
is
worse
in
a
woman
than
in
a
man
.
If
the
seed
chance
to
be
corrupted
in
man
it
causeth
not
so
fearefull
symptomes
as
in
a
woman
:
because
the
seminary
vessels
are
without
the
hypogastrium
in
man
;
but
in
woman
within
.
CAP.
XXIV
.
Of
the
Yard
.
IT
is
called
in
Latine
Penis
à
pendendo
,
The
description
of
it
.
because
it
hangeth
without
the
belly
,
and
it
is
an
organicall
part
,
long
and
round
;
yet
somwhat
flat
in
the
upper
part
,
seated
about
the
lower
part
of
os
pubis
,
appointed
for
making
of
water
,
and
conveighing
the
seed
into
the
matrix
.
It
is
framed
of
such
a
substance
as
might
admit
distention
and
relaxation
.
The
parts
of
it
are
either
Its
parts
.
common
or
proper
.
The
common
are
three
,
the
scarfe
skin
,
the
skin
,
and
the
membrana
carnosa
.
It
hath
no
fat
,
for
it
Why
it
hath
no
fat
.
would
have
hindered
the
stifnesse
of
it
.
The
cuticula
is
of
a
The
cuticula
&
culis
.
reasonable
thicknesse
:
The
skin
is
somewhat
thick
,
flaggy
when
there
is
no
erection
;
but
stiffe
when
there
is
.
The
membrana
carnosa
The
membrana
carnosa
.
is
somewhat
sinewy
.
The
proper
or
internall
The
internall
parts
.
parts
are
these
:
The
two
nervous
bodies
,
the
septum
,
the
vrethra
,
the
glans
,
foure
muscles
,
and
the
vessels
.
The
two
bodies
are
The
two
bodies
.
long
,
hard
,
and
nervous
.
These
within
are
spongious
,
and
full
of
black
blood
.
The
spongious
substance
seemeth
to
be
a
net
like
texture
,
framed
of
innumerable
twigs
of
veins
and
arteries
.
This
black
bloud
contained
in
these
laterall
ligaments
,
being
full
of
spirits
waxen
hot
by
the
sting
of
Venus
,
doth
distend
the
parts
.
These
two
laterall
ligaments
Their
beginning
.
where
they
are
thick
and
round
,
spring
from
the
lower
part
of
the
share
bone
.
In
their
beginnings
,
they
are
separate
one
from
another
,
and
represent
the
two
hornes
of
Pithagoras
his
Y
,
that
the
urethra
may
passe
betweene
them
.
But
as
soone
as
they
Septum
lucidum
.
come
to
the
joyning
of
the
share
bone
,
they
are
by
the
Septum
lucidum
everted
.
It
is
nervous
and
white
.
It
ariseth
from
the
upper
part
of
the
commissure
of
the
os
pubis
,
and
upholdeth
the
two
laterall
ligaments
and
the
urethra
as
a
stay
.
The
like
is
found
in
women
to
uphold
the
cunnus
.
Under
these
lyeth
the
urethra
.
It
is
of
a
substance
nervous
,
The
urethra
thick
,
loose
and
soft
,
like
to
that
of
the
laterall
ligaments
.
It
beginneth
at
the
necke
of
the
bladder
:
yet
it
doth
not
spring
from
it
,
but
is
joyned
to
it
onely
,
and
so
passeth
to
the
glans
.
If
you
boyle
the
bladder
and
it
,
it
will
separate
it selfe
from
the
bladder
.
It
is
framed
of
two
It
s
frame
.
membranes
,
the
one
is
internall
with
the
which
the
glans
is
covered
,
it
is
bred
of
the
thin
membrane
,
which
covereth
the
nerves
of
the
prick
.
It
is
of
an
exquisit
feeling
,
that
it
might
feele
the
acrimony
of
the
seed
,
and
cause
pleasure
;
chiefly
in
that
part
of
it
,
which
lyeth
betweene
the
prostates
.
The
externall
is
fleshy
and
hath
many
fleshy
transverse
fibres
.
The
middle
substance
is
fungous
and
full
of
blacke
bloud
,
that
it
might
suffer
distension
and
relaxation
with
the
laterall
ligaments
.
At
the
beginning
of
it
Its
muscles
.
there
are
three
holes
,
one
in
the
middle
largest
,
and
two
lesser
,
in
each
side
one
,
from
the
passage
,
which
is
sent
from
the
vesicula
seminales
,
to
the
vrethra
.
The
muscles
are
two
in
each
side
,
and
so
foure
in
all
.
Of
these
collaterall
muscles
,
the
one
is
shorter
and
thicker
,
and
springeth
from
the
appendix
or
knob
of
the
coxendix
.
under
the
beginning
of
the
laterall
ligament
,
and
ascending
obliquely
,
is
inserted
into
the
same
,
a
little
below
the
beginning
of
it
;
this
serveth
for
erection
.
The
second
is
longer
and
smaller
,
proceeding
from
the
sphincter
of
the
anus
fleshy
.
This
passeth
straight
under
the
urethra
,
and
is
inserted
about
the
middle
of
it
,
in
the
side
of
the
prick
.
These
two
muscles
dilate
the
lower
part
of
the
urethra
for
miction
and
ejaculation
of
the
seed
.
As
the
first
muscle
is
termed
erector
,
so
this
is
called
accelerator
,
or
hastener
.
This
hath
a
substance
agreeable
with
that
of
the
penis
:
for
this
in
erection
is
drawne
towards
its
beginning
,
and
the
erection
ceasing
,
it
becommeth
lanke
.
Glans
is
the
extreme
part
;
Glans
.
it
is
somewhat
round
compassed
with
a
circle
as
with
a
garland
.
It
is
soft
,
and
of
an
exquisit
feeling
,
by
reason
or
the
thin
skin
,
with
the
which
it
is
covered
.
About
the
root
of
it
,
where
it
is
joyned
with
the
nervous
bodies
,
there
is
a
little
pit
.
In
the
which
if
any
sharp
humour
be
lodged
,
as
in
gonorrhaea
virulenta
,
great
paine
is
caused
.
The
Glans
is
covered
with
praeputium
,
the
fore
Praeputium
.
skin
;
it
is
framed
of
the
reduplication
of
the
skin
.
The
ligament
by
the
Fraenum
.
which
it
is
tyed
to
the
glans
in
the
lower
part
of
it
,
is
called
fraenum
the
bridle
.
Of
the
vessels
,
some
The
vessels
are
cutaneous
,
some
passe
to
the
inner
parts
of
penis
.
The
Cutaneus
veins
and
arteries
spring
from
the
pudendae
;
these
entering
at
the
root
of
the
prick
they
passe
by
the
sides
towards
the
back
of
it
,
and
are
conspicuous
enough
.
The
vessels
which
bestowed
upon
the
inner
parts
of
Penis
,
come
from
the
Venae
and
arteriae
hypogastricae
,
about
the
roots
of
the
laterall
ligaments
.
Here
the
arteries
are
remarkable
,
which
are
wonderfully
despersed
thorow
the
body
of
the
penis
:
for
the
right
artery
is
bestowed
upon
the
left
side
,
and
the
left
upon
the
right
side
.
It
hath
two
sinewes
Its
sinewes
.
from
the
os
sacrum
.
The
lesser
is
bestowed
upon
the
skin
:
The
largest
mounting
up
under
the
share
bones
to
the
root
of
the
yard
,
betweene
the
laterall
ligaments
,
it
is
bestowed
upon
the
muscles
,
the
rest
of
the
body
of
the
Penis
and
the
glans
.
Of
the
Genitals
in
Woman
.
CAP.
XXV
.
Of
the
Cunnus
.
THe
Genitals
in
a
Woman
have
foure
distinct
parts
;
to
wit
,
the
Cunnus
,
the
matrix
,
the
stones
,
and
the
spermatick
vessels
.
Cunnus
is
that
part
The
particles
of
the
Cunnus
.
which
offereth
it selfe
to
the
sight
before
section
.
In
it
eleven
particles
are
remarkable
.
1
1.
Pubes
,
that
particle
where
the
haire
doth
first
bud
out
;
which
ordinarily
falleth
out
the
fourteenth
yeare
of
a
womans
age
,
the
upper
part
of
this
which
buncheth
out
,
and
is
most
hairy
,
is
called
Veneris
mons
.
2.
Is
Rima
magna
,
the
2
great
chink
;
it
beginneth
at
the
os
pubes
,
and
is
but
an
inch
distant
from
the
anus
.
Wherefore
it
is
larger
than
the
cavity
of
the
neck
.
3.
The
Labia
or
lips
,
3
by
these
the
internall
parts
are
covered
,
as
the
tongue
and
teeth
by
the
lips
.
These
are
framed
of
the
common
integuments
of
the
body
,
these
have
prety
store
of
spongious
fat
.
4
4.
Are
the
Alae
,
or
Nymphae
,
the
wings
,
these
appeare
when
the
lips
are
severed
:
These
are
two
productions
framed
of
a
soft
and
spongious
flesh
,
and
the
reduplication
of
the
Cutis
,
placed
at
the
sides
of
the
neck
:
Being
joyned
above
,
they
compasse
the
Clitoris
.
In
figure
and
colour
they
resemble
the
comb
of
a
Cock.
5
5.
Is
Clytoris
,
this
is
a
nervous
and
hard
body
:
within
,
full
of
a
black
and
spongious
matter
,
as
the
laterall
ligaments
of
the
yard
.
It
is
framed
of
three
bodies
.
The
two
laterall
are
ligaments
and
spring
from
the
internall
knob
of
the
Ischium
.
The
third
is
betweene
these
,
this
ariseth
from
the
joyning
of
os
pubis
;
at
the
end
of
it
is
the
glans
,
which
hath
a
superficiall
hollownesse
,
and
is
covered
with
a
very
thin
skin
,
as
a
Praeputium
,
which
springeth
from
the
joyning
of
the
Nymphae
.
And
as
it
doth
represent
the
prick
of
a
man
,
so
it
suffereth
erection
,
and
falling
;
It
may
be
called
a
womans
prick
.
In
some
women
it
hath
beene
as
big
as
a
mans
.
6
6.
Under
the
Clytoris
above
the
neck
a
hole
is
to
be
seene
,
by
the
which
a
woman
maketh
water
.
7
7.
After
the
Nymphae
foure
caruncules
resembling
the
leafe
of
the
mirtle
shrub
,
are
to
bee
seene
:
Whereof
that
which
is
uppermost
,
is
largest
and
forked
,
that
it
might
receive
the
end
of
the
neck
of
the
bladder
,
the
other
is
below
:
The
other
are
on
the
sides
.
All
foure
keep
back
the
ayre
,
and
all
other
things
,
from
entring
into
the
cavity
of
the
neck
,
and
by
tickling
the
genital
of
man
cause
the
greater
delight
.
In
women
which
have
not
borne
children
,
they
are
most
conspicuous
.
These
caruncules
are
framed
of
the
reduplication
of
the
fleshy
necke
of
the
genitall
.
8.
Behind
the
caruncules
8
appeareth
a
cavity
in
the
lower
part
of
the
neck
of
a
reasonable
largenesse
,
framed
by
nature
to
stay
the
seede
powred
into
the
necke
from
too
quick
slipping
out
.
9
9.
In
Virgins
these
caruncules
are
joyned
together
by
a
thin
and
sinewy
membrane
interlaced
with
small
veins
,
cleaving
orbicularly
to
the
sides
of
the
neck
,
having
a
small
hollownesse
in
the
middle
,
which
will
receive
a
pease
,
by
the
which
the
menstruall
bloud
passeth
:
Sometimes
it
is
hollow
like
a
sive
,
it
is
called
hymen
.
10.
Behind
these
caruncules
10
and
the
hymen
appeareth
a
chink
,
under
the
orifice
of
the
bladder
betweene
the
two
wings
,
which
is
the
entrance
into
the
neck
.
11.
Now
the
neck
is
11
nothing
else
but
that
distance
,
The
neck
.
which
is
between
the
Cunnus
,
and
the
mouth
of
the
matrix
.
In
women
of
an
ordinary
It
s
length
.
stature
,
it
is
eight
inches
in
length
.
The
substance
of
this
It
s
substance
.
part
is
hard
,
without
,
fleshy
;
within
membranous
,
and
wrinckled
like
to
the
inner
skin
of
the
upper
jaw
of
a
cowes
mouth
.
First
,
to
cause
greater
pleasure
in
the
act
of
generation
.
Secondly
,
the
better
to
retaine
the
seed
.
Thirdly
,
to
admit
the
greater
dilatation
in
travell
.
The
neck
is
seated
in
It
s
seat
.
that
cavity
of
hypogastrium
,
which
is
called
pelvis
,
betweene
the
bladder
and
intestinum
rectum
.
It
hath
two
membranes
;
if
you
cut
them
transversly
,
you
shall
perceive
between
them
a
spongious
flesh
:
such
as
is
found
in
the
laterall
ligaments
of
the
Penis
.
This
causeth
it
to
swell
in
the
act
of
generation
,
innumerable
sprigs
of
veins
and
arteries
affording
plenty
of
spirits
.
The
hypogastricall
Its
vessels
.
veins
are
inserted
into
the
neck
of
the
matrix
:
from
thence
passing
to
the
mouth
of
the
matrix
.
As
soone
as
they
come
to
be
implanted
into
the
substance
of
the
uterus
,
they
lose
their
owne
coats
,
which
are
bestowed
upon
the
first
membrane
of
it
.
From
thence
by
small
pipes
(
such
as
are
found
in
sponges
)
but
wreathed
blood
is
caried
to
the
matrix
:
by
these
veins
the
termes
issue
into
the
neck
of
the
genitall
.
A
large
branch
passeth
from
arteria
hypogastrica
to
the
neck
.
A
sprig
of
it
,
but
wreathed
is
communicate
to
the
resticle
,
passing
thither
between
the
two
membranes
of
the
body
of
the
matrix
:
This
sprig
is
winded
to
hinder
it
from
ruption
,
when
the
matrix
is
enlarged
,
a
woman
being
with
child
.
CAP.
XXVI
.
Of
the
Matrix
.
THe
Matrix
was
appointed
by
Nature
to
be
the
field
of
nature
,
to
receive
the
seeds
of
man
and
woman
for
the
procreation
of
man
,
and
the
continuation
of
mankind
.
It
hath
two
parts
,
os
uteri
,
The
parts
of
it
.
the
mouth
of
the
matrix
,
and
fundus
the
bottome
.
The
mouth
is
a
hole
The
month
of
it
.
at
the
entrance
of
it
,
which
like
a
mouth
may
be
dilated
,
or
pursed
in
:
this
entrance
is
but
a
transverse
line
,
which
when
it
is
exactly
opened
becommeth
round
.
This
orifice
,
although
in
the
act
of
generation
it
may
be
so
dilated
,
that
it
will
receive
the
glans
of
a
mans
genitall
;
yet
after
conception
it
is
so
closely
shut
,
that
it
will
not
admit
the
point
of
a
bodkin
.
When
a
woman
is
delivered
,
it
so
openeth
it selfe
,
that
it
maketh
way
for
the
infant
,
be
it
never
so
big
.
In
those
who
have
been
mothers
,
it
is
like
to
the
mouth
of
a
whelpe
.
The
cancer
of
the
matrix
most
commonly
beginneth
here
,
because
it
is
somewhat
fleshy
:
within
this
orifice
a
long
knobby
substance
is
placed
,
to
help
the
shutting
of
the
orifice
the
more
exquisitly
.
About
this
knobby
substance
,
small
holes
are
to
be
seene
,
which
seeme
to
be
the
ends
of
the
ejaculatory
vessels
.
It
s
figure
.
In
figure
it
is
like
a
peare
or
a
cupping
glasse
.
In
Virgins
even
of
a
It
s
bignesse
.
big
stature
it
exceedeth
not
the
bignesse
of
a
walnut
.
But
in
those
who
are
with
child
,
it
doth
dilate
it selfe
into
that
capacity
,
as
is
able
to
containe
the
child
.
It
was
to
be
small
,
because
Why
it
is
small
.
the
seed
in
quantity
is
but
little
,
which
it
ought
to
embrace
and
cherish
.
It
hath
no
distinct
cels
No
distinctcelles
in
it
.
as
the
matrix
of
a
beast
hath
;
onely
a
line
,
as
in
the
tongue
and
cod
,
doth
separate
the
right
side
from
the
left
.
In
length
from
the
orfice
to
the
extremity
of
the
bottome
,
it
is
thought
to
be
three
inches
.
The
internall
superficies
is
rough
the
better
to
keepe
the
seed
.
The
matrix
is
framed
It
s
frame
.
of
two
membranes
,
the
externall
springeth
from
the
peritonaeum
,
and
is
the
thickest
of
all
other
,
that
spring
from
it
.
It
is
smooth
and
slippery
if
you
except
those
parts
where
the
spermatick
vessell
enter
into
the
matrix
,
and
where
the
ligaments
goe
out
.
The
internall
membrane
is
full
of
small
holes
,
where
the
matrix
covereth
the
intestinum
rectum
.
When
the
courses
flow
,
they
are
easily
seene
;
but
not
when
they
cease
.
The
Ancients
did
take
these
to
be
the
mouths
of
the
veins
and
arteries
.
And
because
they
resemble
Acetabula
.
in
figure
the
measure
appointed
for
the
selling
of
vineger
,
they
called
them
Acetabula
or
Cotidones
.
By
these
holes
the
menstruall
bloud
issueth
.
Above
at
the
sides
of
Cornua
uteri
.
the
externall
membrane
two
little
bunches
,
such
as
are
seene
in
stirks
or
hayfers
,
when
the
hornes
begin
to
bud
,
are
to
be
marked
.
They
are
called
cornua
uteri
.
For
nourishment
it
Its
vessels
.
hath
both
veins
and
arteries
.
Of
these
the
veins
are
The
veins
.
bigger
than
the
arteries
:
the
veins
spring
from
two
branches
on
each
side
:
one
branch
commeth
from
the
vasa
praeparantia
:
this
doth
descend
,
and
is
spread
thorow
the
whole
matrix
:
but
chiefly
thorow
the
bottom
:
and
seeing
the
sprigs
are
implanted
in
each
side
,
the
right
are
coupled
with
the
left
by
inosculation
.
The
other
branch
which
commeth
from
ramus
hypogastricus
,
doth
ascend
from
the
lower
parts
,
and
is
sent
partly
to
the
orifice
,
partly
to
the
bottom
.
These
are
larger
than
those
which
spring
from
the
vas
praeparans
.
Both
these
being
despersed
thorow
the
substance
of
the
matrix
are
united
by
inosculation
also
.
Some
will
have
the
menstruall
bloud
to
flow
from
the
twigs
,
sent
from
Ramus
hypogastricus
when
a
woman
is
with
child
:
being
perswaded
by
the
Aphorisme
of
Hippocrates
lib.
5.
Aphor.
51.
that
nothing
can
flow
from
the
cavity
,
the
orifice
being
so
shut
that
it
cannot
admit
the
point
of
a
bodkin
;
but
the
word
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
signifieth
only
connivens
,
or
shut
together
,
as
the
eye
lids
are
.
And
although
in
the
first
moneths
the
orifice
be
exactly
closed
;
yet
when
a
woman
is
great
with
child
the
orifice
gapeth
a
little
,
and
is
shut
with
a
mucous
seminall
substance
,
which
doth
repell
the
aire
,
and
lubricate
the
orifice
in
the
delivery
.
It
hath
arteries
also
,
Arteries
.
which
spring
from
the
preparing
arteries
,
and
from
the
hypogastricae
,
as
the
veins
did
;
these
accompany
the
veins
,
and
are
distributed
as
they
are
.
The
sinews
first
doe
The
sinewes
spring
from
the
sixt
conjugation
:
they
are
small
,
and
are
bestowed
upon
the
bottom
:
then
from
the
pares
which
spring
from
the
os
sacrum
.
These
are
bestowed
partly
upon
the
lower
part
of
it
,
and
partly
upon
the
Cunnus
.
These
are
larger
,
because
in
the
act
of
generation
great
delectation
is
required
.
By
these
vessels
,
arteries
,
veins
and
nerves
,
the
matrix
hath
a
consent
with
all
the
rest
of
the
body
.
And
although
the
veins
,
and
arteries
seeme
to
bee
small
in
women
which
are
not
with
child
;
yet
in
those
who
are
with
child
,
by
the
affluxion
of
bloud
,
they
will
sometimes
become
as
thick
as
a
finger
.
Yea
in
such
the
matrix
which
otherwaies
is
membranous
,
as
hath
beene
said
,
becommeth
in
the
last
moneths
thicker
and
softer
:
so
that
about
the
upper
part
of
the
bottom
,
unto
the
which
the
placenta
uteri
is
tyed
,
it
becommeth
almost
two
inches
thick
.
The
matrix
is
onely
tyed
to
the
adjacent
parts
laterally
:
Iti
connexion
.
for
above
,
fore
,
and
after
,
it
is
free
that
it
might
admit
dilatation
,
and
descend
or
ascend
in
the
act
of
generation
.
Now
the
ligament
Its
ligaments
.
are
in
number
foure
.
The
two
uppermost
broad
and
membranous
are
nothing
else
but
production
of
the
peritonaeum
,
which
tye
the
matrix
to
the
ossa
ilii
.
They
are
loose
and
soft
,
that
they
might
admit
dilatation
with
the
matrix
,
when
a
woman
is
with
child
,
and
constriction
when
she
is
not
.
These
carry
the
vasa
praeparantia
and
deferentia
to
the
matrix
,
and
lap
up
the
stones
:
they
represent
the
wings
of
a
bat
,
or
the
sayles
of
a
ship
spred
abroad
.
These
keepe
the
matrix
steady
in
its
own
place
,
that
it
neither
ascend
not
descend
.
The
two
lower
ligaments
are
nervous
,
round
,
and
hollow
;
they
spring
from
the
sides
of
the
bottom
of
the
matrix
,
neere
to
the
vasa
deferentia
,
which
they
touch
;
they
go
down
to
the
groynes
,
by
the
production
of
the
peritonaeum
strengthned
by
glandules
:
And
being
dilated
like
a
membrane
,
they
bestow
one
part
upon
the
clytoris
:
The
residue
passeth
to
the
knee
,
in
the
inside
of
the
thigh
by
the
Membrana
adiposa
,
this
is
the
cause
why
women
after
conception
feele
paine
in
the
inside
of
the
thigh
.
These
ligaments
ferve
not
onely
to
stay
the
matrix
,
but
because
they
are
hollow
,
by
them
noysome
humours
of
the
genitals
are
sent
to
the
glandules
of
the
groines
.
So
after
impure
copulation
,
the
seminary
vessels
being
infected
,
the
contagious
humour
,
by
these
ligaments
is
sent
to
the
groynes
:
from
whence
arise
bubones
venerei
.
CAP.
XXVII
.
Of
the
stones
and
the
seminary
vessels
.
WOMEN
have
stones
as
Men
The
differences
betweene
the
stones
of
a
woman
and
of
a
man
.
have
;
but
they
differ
in
eleven
things
.
-
1.
In
situation
,
for
they
are
placed
not
without
the
hypogastrium
,
as
in
men
;
but
within
it
:
that
they
might
be
the
hotter
and
more
fruitfull
.
-
2.
In
quantity
,
for
they
are
lesser
.
-
3.
In
their
frame
,
for
they
are
composed
of
five
or
six
bladders
,
which
make
them
uneven
:
whereas
the
stones
of
men
are
smooth
:
these
bladders
containe
an
humidity
like
to
whey
;
but
it
is
thicker
.
-
4.
The
stones
of
women
have
no
cremasters
;
but
are
stayed
by
the
broad
laterall
ligaments
,
called
the
bats
wings
.
-
5.
They
have
no
prostates
.
-
6.
They
differ
in
figure
,
for
in
man
they
are
ovall
;
but
in
woman
flattish
.
-
7.
They
have
but
one
membrane
;
whereas
mans
hath
foure
.
-
8.
In
substance
,
for
they
are
more
soft
and
flaggy
than
in
man
.
-
9.
In
temperature
,
for
they
are
more
cold
than
mans
stones
:
and
containe
a
thin
and
watrish
seed
.
-
10.
In
women
they
are
tyed
to
the
sides
of
the
uterus
by
the
two
upper
ligaments
,
which
are
loose
and
membranous
.
-
11.
In
women
which
are
not
with
child
,
they
are
placed
above
the
matrix
,
two
inches
distant
from
it
.
The
seminary
vessels
Its
veins
.
preparing
,
are
foure
,
two
veines
,
and
so
many
arteries
.
The
vein
of
the
right
side
springeth
as
in
man
,
from
the
trunck
of
the
vena
cava
under
the
emulgent
;
but
that
of
the
left
side
springeth
from
the
middle
of
the
emulgent
of
the
same
side
.
Both
the
arteries
spring
from
the
descending
trunck
of
the
great
artery
.
Its
arteries
.
These
veins
are
not
united
as
in
man
,
before
they
come
to
the
stones
,
but
are
divided
into
two
branches
.
Whereof
the
greater
being
stayed
by
the
membranous
ligament
,
is
caried
to
the
stone
;
but
the
lesser
endeth
in
the
bottome
of
the
matrix
in
the
upper
part
,
for
the
nutrition
of
the
matrix
,
and
the
embryo
.
These
vasa
preparantia
The
difference
betweene
these
and
those
in
men
.
differ
from
those
in
men
in
these
things
.
First
,
they
are
shorter
than
in
man
,
by
reason
of
the
shortnesse
of
the
passage
:
but
they
have
more
wreathings
where
they
make
corpus
varicosum
,
about
the
stone
,
that
the
seed
may
be
the
better
prepared
.
Secondly
,
they
passe
not
whole
to
the
stones
as
in
man
;
but
are
divided
in
the
mid
way
,
as
hath
been
said
.
One
thing
is
to
be
noted
,
An
observation
.
that
the
spermatick
veins
receive
the
arteries
as
they
passe
by
the
sides
of
the
uterus
,
that
the
bloud
might
be
the
better
elaborat
:
for
if
you
blow
up
the
vena
spermatica
,
both
the
right
and
left
vessels
of
the
matrix
are
blowne
up
.
From
hence
you
may
perceive
the
communion
of
all
the
vessels
of
the
matrix
.
The
Vesa
deferentia
Vasa
deferentia
.
spring
from
the
lower
part
of
the
stones
.
They
are
firme
,
white
,
and
nervous
.
They
passe
by
the
membranous
ligament
to
the
matrix
,
not
straight
,
but
wreathed
;
that
the
shortnesse
of
the
way
might
be
recompensed
with
the
multitude
of
windings
.
Neere
the
stones
they
are
somewhat
broad
.
When
they
have
marched
a
little
,
they
become
narrow
,
and
about
the
matrix
they
become
broad
againe
,
and
end
in
the
cornua
&
capacity
of
it
.
Amongst
these
vessels
the
last
to
be
considered
is
Tuba
Fallopiana
.
Spigeltus
Tuba
Fallopiana
.
calleth
it
Vas
coecum
,
lib.
8.
cap.
20.
because
it
hath
but
one
orifice
,
as
the
intestinum
coecum
annexed
to
colon
;
this
springeth
from
the
cornua
or
bunches
,
and
resembleth
the
end
of
a
trumpet
,
and
passeth
obliqaely
,
over
against
the
stone
caried
by
the
membranous
ligament
,
and
compasseth
the
stones
:
but
it
neither
proceedeth
from
the
stones
,
neither
is
inserted
into
them
:
And
as
in
its
beginning
it
is
open
;
so
in
its
ending
it
is
shut
.
Riolan
will
have
it
to
be
the
end
of
the
ejaculatory
vessell
,
ending
within
the
matrix
.
He
observeth
that
within
it
is
to
be
seene
a
long
,
white
and
sinewy
body
,
which
he
will
have
to
be
the
continuation
of
the
ejaculatory
vessell
.
He
noteth
also
that
a
small
sprig
doth
passe
but
wreathed
from
the
ejaculatory
,
by
the
sides
of
the
uterus
to
the
orifice
:
by
the
which
women
with
child
spend
their
seed
in
the
act
of
generation
;
which
Spigelius
denieth
in
the
cited
place
,
and
checketh
Laurentius
for
affirming
such
a
passage
.
THE
SECOND
Book
of
the
Brest
.
CAP.
I.
Of
the
common
containing
parts
of
it
.
HItherto
then
of
the
lower
belly
,
the
seat
of
the
naturall
spirit
,
and
of
the
parts
appointed
for
nutrition
and
procreation
:
Now
it
followeth
that
we
handle
the
middle
cavity
the
seat
of
the
vitall
spirit
,
which
containeth
those
parts
appointed
for
the
cherishing
of
the
naturall
heat
,
the
distribution
of
the
same
to
all
other
parts
of
the
body
,
and
the
cooling
of
it
,
if
it
exceed
the
naturall
degree
.
This
ventricle
is
seated
in
the
middle
,
The
situation
of
it
.
betweene
the
uppermost
,
which
is
the
head
,
and
lowermost
,
which
is
the
belly
:
for
it
was
fit
,
that
it
should
be
so
,
that
the
heat
passing
thorow
all
,
and
bestowing
life
should
equally
bee
bestowed
upon
all
the
parts
of
the
body
.
It
is
severed
from
the
The
limitation
of
it
.
head
by
the
neck
;
from
the
belly
by
the
midrife
.
It
is
bounded
in
the
forepart
by
the
brest-bone
,
and
cartilages
.
In
the
sides
by
the
ribs
:
Behind
by
the
vertebrae
of
the
back
.
The
figure
of
it
is
ovall
,
The
figure
of
it
.
somewhat
flat
before
and
behind
,
whereas
in
beasts
it
is
somewhat
sharp
:
So
that
onely
man
lieth
on
his
back
.
The
substance
of
it
.
It
is
partly
bony
,
partly
fleshy
,
that
it
might
admit
motion
,
and
yet
not
styfle
the
heart
;
the
fleshy
parts
being
suspended
by
the
bony
.
The
fore
part
of
it
is
The
parts
of
it
.
called
sternum
,
the
sides
costae
,
and
the
hinder
parts
dorsum
.
The
parts
whereof
it
is
composed
,
are
either
containing
or
contained
.
The
parts
containing
are
either
common
or
proper
.
The
parts
containing
The
common
containing
parts
.
common
are
in
number
foure
,
Cuticula
,
Cutis
,
Pinguedo
,
and
Membrana
carnosa
.
The
scarfe
skin
,
and
1.2
.
Cuticula
.
skin
of
it
do
differ
from
those
in
the
belly
:
for
it
is
hairy
under
the
arme
pits
,
and
above
the
pit
of
the
heart
:
the
skin
of
the
back
is
both
harder
and
thicker
,
and
so
is
lesse
hairy
.
Secondly
,
the
skin
of
the
back
part
is
of
an
exquisit
feeling
:
first
,
because
many
twigs
of
sinews
are
bestowed
upon
it
from
the
Nervis
,
proceeding
from
the
spinalis
medulla
:
secondly
,
by
reason
of
the
muscles
of
the
brest
placed
there
,
which
have
many
tendons
,
and
so
are
very
sensible
.
As
for
the
fat
,
it
is
3.
Pinguedo
.
not
plentifull
here
as
in
the
belly
:
first
,
because
the
naturall
heat
here
is
sufficiently
preserved
without
it
:
secondly
,
because
it
would
have
hindered
the
motion
of
the
brest
.
Onely
here
it
is
somewhat
yellowish
.
The
Membrana
carnosa
4.
The
Membrana
carnosa
.
here
in
the
forepart
of
the
neck
is
more
fleshy
than
in
other
parts
,
chiefly
where
the
musculus
quadratus
is
framed
,
which
pulleth
downe
the
cheekes
and
lips
.
CAP.
II.
Of
the
Dugs
.
THe
proper
containing
The
parts
of
the
brest
.
parts
are
either
externall
or
internall
.
The
externall
are
in
number
three
,
the
dugs
,
the
muscles
,
the
bones
.
The
internall
proper
containing
parts
are
three
in
like
manner
,
the
pleura
,
the
mediastinum
,
and
the
pericardium
.
Dugs
are
granted
to
both
the
sexes
,
in
men
The
paps
of
men
.
they
are
framed
of
the
cutis
,
the
membrana
carnosa
,
fat
,
and
the
nipple
,
and
serve
onely
for
beauty
,
and
are
called
mammillae
.
If
in
man
a
whitish
substance
representing
milk
,
bee
found
in
the
nipples
,
which
hath
been
seene
,
as
witnesseth
Aristotel
.
1.
Histor.
Animal.
12.
it
is
unprofitable
,
and
unapt
to
nourish
.
The
paps
in
women
besides
these
parts
,
The
parts
of
the
paps
in
woman
.
have
remarkable
vessels
,
glandules
and
pipes
,
to
containe
the
milk
perfected
by
the
glandules
.
The
glandules
are
The
glandulous
bodies
.
many
,
not
one
;
that
the
milk
might
be
the
better
elabored
.
There
is
placed
above
the
rest
,
one
somewhat
bigger
under
the
nipple
.
Betweene
these
are
placed
innumerable
veins
and
arteries
,
which
receive
blood
from
the
matrix
the
materiall
cause
of
milk
.
When
these
are
full
of
bloud
,
the
milk
is
made
by
the
property
of
the
substance
of
the
glandulous
bodies
,
and
their
temperament
.
The
milk
perfected
is
sent
to
the
tubuli
lactiferi
or
conduicts
of
milk
,
these
end
in
the
nipple
.
The
veins
are
of
two
The
veins
.
sorts
,
for
some
are
externall
,
some
internall
.
The
externall
spring
from
the
axillar
branch
,
and
are
placed
under
the
skin
,
which
covereth
the
dugs
to
nourish
it
,
and
are
called
Thoracicae
superiores
,
or
the
uppermost
brest
veins
.
The
internall
or
inferior
called
mammariae
,
spring
from
the
rami
subclavii
.
They
are
in
number
two
,
whereof
one
doth
match
downward
straight
by
the
sides
of
the
brest
bone
.
When
they
are
come
to
the
macranata
cartilago
,
they
passe
out
of
the
brest
,
and
goe
downward
by
the
lower
part
of
the
musculi
recti
.
When
they
are
come
to
the
umbilicall
region
almost
,
they
are
joyned
with
skin
,
by
sundry
inosculations
,
with
the
venae
epigastricae
,
which
meet
them
there
.
These
venae
epigastricae
,
spring
from
the
externall
ramusiliacus
,
and
by
a
straight
way
passe
upward
under
these
muscles
.
From
this
same
branch
,
spring
the
vena
hypogastricae
which
are
inserted
into
the
neck
and
bottome
of
the
matrix
.
There
are
arteriae
mammariae
The
arteries
.
in
like
manner
,
which
spring
from
the
rami
subclavii
,
and
goe
downe
to
the
navell
.
Whither
when
they
are
come
,
they
are
united
by
inosculation
with
the
Arteriae
epigastricae
ascending
.
They
have
nerves
from
the
fourth
intercostall
nerve
,
Nerves
.
which
about
the
middle
of
the
rib
,
perforating
the
intercostall
muscle
,
is
divided
into
foure
branches
,
which
are
sent
afterward
to
the
pectorall
muscle
,
the
thicker
passing
to
the
nipple
.
Betweene
these
glandulous
The
fat
.
bodies
and
vessels
plenty
of
fat
is
placed
to
procure
smoothnesse
&
equality
to
the
paps
.
If
this
be
wasted
either
by
sicknesse
of
old
age
,
the
dugs
become
flaggy
.
The
paps
are
of
figure
The
figure
of
the
dugs
.
round
;
both
,
that
they
should
be
more
capable
of
milk
,
and
lesse
subject
to
brufings
.
In
number
they
are
Their
number
.
two
,
that
if
one
should
faile
,
the
other
should
supply
the
defect
.
In
Men
,
Women
,
and
Their
situation
.
Apes
,
which
carry
their
young
ones
in
their
armes
,
they
are
seated
in
the
brest
:
-
1.
That
the
mother
should
take
pleasure
by
beholding
the
child
.
-
2.
That
by
the
talking
of
the
mother
,
the
child
should
learne
to
speake
,
and
be
endued
with
reason
.
-
3.
That
being
neere
to
the
heart
,
they
should
receive
plenty
of
heat
.
-
4.
For
beauty
.
-
5.
For
convenient
giving
of
suck
,
for
the
child
cannot
presently
goe
when
it
is
borne
;
but
must
be
borne
in
the
armes
and
applyed
to
the
teat
.
-
6.
For
the
commodity
of
the
act
of
generation
.
-
7.
For
the
defence
of
the
vitall
parts
.
-
8.
For
the
incitation
of
lust
.
-
9.
To
be
a
receptacle
of
excrementitious
humours
.
So
women
are
often
troubled
with
cancers
.
The
nipple
is
placed
in
Of
the
nipple
.
the
middle
of
the
dug
,
where
the
milky
conduits
end
.
It
is
a
round
body
standing
out
,
that
the
infant
may
take
hold
of
it
with
the
lips
.
It
is
of
a
fungous
substance
,
that
it
may
admit
distention
and
contraction
.
It
hath
many
holes
:
which
appeare
when
the
milk
is
pressed
out
.
It
is
rougher
than
the
other
parts
of
the
dug
,
that
the
infant
may
the
more
firmly
hold
it
.
It
is
of
an
exquisit
sense
,
that
the
nurse
should
find
some
pleasure
,
when
she
giveth
suck
:
It
is
framed
of
the
reduplication
of
the
skin
.
Now
the
milk
which
What
milk
is
.
is
drawen
thorow
the
holes
of
it
by
the
Infant
,
is
nothing
else
but
a
white
liquour
,
engendered
of
the
venall
and
arteriall
bloud
,
sent
from
the
matrix
,
and
altered
by
the
glandules
of
the
dugs
;
in
taste
pleasant
,
which
is
easily
cincocted
by
the
stomack
,
and
doth
speedily
and
plentifully
nourish
.
As
for
the
muscles
,
they
are
set
down
in
the
Treatise
of
Muscles
,
Cap.
15.
The
bones
,
which
were
said
to
be
the
third
proper
externall
containing
part
,
are
set
downe
in
doctrine
of
bones
.
CAP.
III.
Of
the
proper
internall
containing
parts
.
THese
are
in
number
three
,
the
Pleura
,
the
Mediastinum
,
and
the
Pericardium
.
The
Pleura
hath
its
denomination
from
the
ribs
,
under
which
it
is
placed
,
and
so
it
may
be
termed
in
English
the
costall
membrane
.
It
is
a
membrane
,
It
s
substance
.
white
,
thin
,
hard
,
resembling
the
Peritonaeum
Spigelius
de
human
.
corp.
Fabr.
lib.
9.
cap
3.
will
have
it
to
be
thicker
and
stronger
than
the
Peritonaeum
,
contrary
to
the
opinion
of
Riolan
,
who
affirmeth
the
Peritonaeum
to
be
thicker
and
stronger
;
because
it
is
appointed
for
the
sustaining
the
weight
of
the
guts
.
It
is
every
where
double
:
the
inner
part
is
Its
parts
.
thickest
,
smoothest
,
and
as
it
were
bedewed
with
a
watrish
humour
,
that
it
should
not
hurt
the
lungs
by
its
roughnesse
:
This
watrish
humour
doth
spring
from
the
vapours
raised
from
the
blood
condensed
,
by
respective
coldnesse
of
the
membrane
.
The
outer
part
is
thinner
,
yet
rougher
;
that
it
should
cleave
the
more
firmely
to
the
ribs
.
As
for
its
figure
,
without
It
s
figure
.
it
is
arched
,
within
hollow
:
Above
it
is
narrower
,
below
broader
,
chiefly
towards
the
sides
:
From
it
spring
some
sinewy
fibres
,
by
the
which
the
lungs
are
tied
to
it
.
If
these
be
too
strait
,
the
motion
of
the
lungs
is
hindered
,
and
so
an
uncurable
difficulty
of
breathing
procured
.
Above
it
is
perforat
in
Its
holes
.
five
places
,
to
give
way
to
the
vena
cava
,
and
the
aorta
ascending
,
the
gula
,
the
wind-pipe
,
and
the
nerves
of
the
sixth
paire
.
Below
where
it
covereth
the
midrife
,
it
is
perforat
in
three
places
,
to
give
way
to
vena
cava
,
and
the
aorta
descending
,
as
also
to
the
gula
.
It
is
framed
of
the
It
s
beginning
.
membranes
,
covering
the
spinalis
medulla
;
for
those
joyning
with
the
sinews
of
the
brest
,
growing
broader
,
produce
it
.
It
hath
veins
and
arteries
The
vessels
.
for
nourishment
and
life
,
and
nerves
for
feeling
.
On
each
side
it
hath
Veins
.
12.
veins
;
whereof
the
two
uppermost
spring
from
the
higher
intercostall
branch
,
and
the
ten
lower
from
the
vena
sine
pari
.
Some
many
arteries
are
in
like
manner
;
Arteries
.
whereof
the
foure
uppermost
proceed
from
the
superior
intercostall
,
and
the
inferior
eight
,
from
the
hinder
part
of
the
aorta
,
descending
.
It
hath
twelve
nerves
Nerves
.
in
like
manner
;
wherof
the
fore
branches
which
spring
from
the
vertebrae
of
the
brest
,
are
bestowed
upon
the
forepart
;
but
the
hindermost
branches
are
bestowed
upon
the
muscles
,
which
are
placed
upon
the
back
.
These
vessels
are
placed
The
seat
of
the
vessels
and
the
pleuresie
.
betweene
the
duplication
of
the
pleura
,
and
the
pleuresie
it selfe
is
not
seated
in
this
place
onely
;
but
betweene
the
pleura
also
,
and
the
intercostall
muscles
.
It
Its
uses
.
hath
two
uses
:
First
,
to
wrap
in
all
the
vitall
parts
:
Secondly
,
to
defend
them
from
all
externall
injuries
.
The
second
membrane
Of
the
Mediastinum
.
is
the
mediastinum
because
it
standeth
in
the
middle
of
the
brest
,
and
divideth
the
right
side
from
the
left
.
In
hath
not
onely
a
duplication
as
the
pleura
hath
,
but
is
double
also
;
for
one
is
in
the
right
side
,
the
other
in
the
left
.
They
are
united
according
to
the
longitude
of
the
vertevrae
of
the
back
;
but
severed
towards
the
sternum
.
In
the
cavity
between
Observation
these
parts
of
the
mediastinum
,
one
may
bee
deeply
wounded
,
without
any
great
danger
of
death
.
Such
a
wound
you
shall
easily
discern
;
First
,
if
small
store
of
bloud
issue
out
.
Secondly
,
if
no
breath
come
out
.
This
cavity
is
seene
when
the
Cartilago
xiphoides
is
removed
.
In
the
dropsie
of
the
lungs
,
and
when
corrupt
mattet
is
gathered
,
the
sternum
here
may
be
tripaned
.
The
substance
of
it
is
It
s
substance
.
membranous
,
yet
thinner
and
softer
than
the
pleura
.
The
inner
side
towards
the
lungs
is
smooth
,
and
hath
fat
about
the
vessels
;
but
the
exterior
is
rougher
,
by
reason
of
the
fibres
,
by
the
which
it
is
tied
to
the
pleura
.
It
reacheth
from
the
It
s
largenesse
.
throat
to
the
midrife
.
As
for
its
vessels
,
veins
Its
veins
.
Its
arteries
.
and
arteries
,
it
hath
from
those
called
mammariae
,
but
small
,
and
from
vena
sine
pari
.
It
hath
one
speciall
vein
called
mediastina
,
which
springeth
from
the
lower
part
of
ramus
subclavius
.
The
nerves
called
stomachici
Its
nerves
.
passe
by
the
reduplication
of
it
.
It
hath
three
uses
:
First
,
it
divideth
the
breast
and
lungs
in
two
parts
,
that
one
being
wounded
the
other
should
be
safe
.
Secondly
,
it
holdeth
up
the
pericardium
firmly
,
wherein
the
heart
is
contained
,
that
it
should
not
rest
upon
the
back-bone
when
we
ly
upon
our
back
,
or
that
it
should
fall
upon
the
brest
bone
when
wee
bend
our selves
towards
the
ground
,
or
touch
the
ribs
when
we
ly
upon
our
sides
.
Thirdly
,
it
giveth
a
safe
passage
to
the
vessels
which
passe
by
it
.
The
third
proper
containing
Of
the
pericardium
.
part
is
the
pericardium
,
so
called
because
it
compasseth
the
whole
heart
,
whose
figure
it
hath
,
for
it
is
pyramidall
.
It
is
so
farre
distant
from
the
heart
,
as
is
sufficient
to
give
way
to
the
motion
of
the
same
,
and
the
containing
of
the
waterish
humour
.
It
hath
two
membranes
:
Its
membranes
.
1.
Outer
from
the
mediastinum
,
it
is
It
s
connexion
.
tied
before
and
behind
to
the
pleura
;
from
It
s
beginning
.
whence
both
the
mediastinum
and
pericardium
originally
spring
.
2.
Inner
from
proceeding
from
the
externall
tunicles
of
the
vessels
of
the
heart
:
for
within
the
pericardium
the
vessels
lack
their
common
tunicle
,
it
having
beene
spent
upon
the
pericardium
.
The
externall
membrane
is
fibrous
;
but
the
internall
is
slippery
,
but
firme
and
thick
.
The
motion
of
it
is
secondary
from
the
heart
.
It
leaneth
more
to
the
It
s
situation
.
left
side
than
to
the
right
,
and
more
to
the
fore
than
back
part
.
It
cleaveth
so
firmly
to
the
nervous
circle
of
the
midrife
,
that
it
cannot
be
separat
from
it
without
renting
,
to
direct
the
motion
of
the
heart
.
It
is
perforat
in
five
Its
holes
.
places
.
In
two
for
the
entering
in
,
and
passing
out
of
the
vena
cava
.
In
three
for
vena
arteriosa
,
and
arteria
venosa
,
and
the
passing
out
of
the
aorta
.
It
hath
small
veins
Its
vessels
.
from
the
phrenicae
,
the
axillar
.
No
arteries
appeare
,
because
it
is
neere
enough
to
the
heart
.
It
hath
two
uses
:
Its
uses
.
First
,
to
keepe
the
heart
in
its
owne
place
,
whether
we
bend
our
body
backwards
,
forwad
,
or
to
either
side
.
Secondly
,
to
containe
the
watrish
humour
,
which
is
sundry
waies
profitable
:
for
first
,
it
tempereth
the
heat
of
the
heart
:
Secondly
,
it
moystneth
the
same
:
Thirdly
,
it
maketh
it
slippery
:
Last
of
all
the
pericardia
defendeth
the
heart
as
an
armour
from
all
externall
injuries
.
The
watrish
humour
The
watrish
humour
in
the
pericardium
.
which
is
contained
in
the
pericardium
,
is
like
urine
:
yet
not
sharp
or
saltish
.
If
it
be
thock
and
slimy
,
is
causeth
the
heart
to
be
hairy
.
If
it
be
too
copious
,
it
causeth
the
painting
of
the
heart
,
which
is
cured
by
phlebotomy
.
It
is
too
plentifull
in
those
who
have
obstructions
of
the
mesaraicall
veins
,
liver
,
or
spleene
:
for
in
such
the
thinnest
part
of
the
chylus
onely
is
drawne
for
nourishment
,
and
so
the
bloud
becommeth
watrish
.
Some
thinke
it
to
It
s
generation
.
proceed
from
a
seminall
aquosity
,
even
from
the
first
generation
:
as
the
aire
within
the
eares
is
from
a
flatuous
.
Others
think
that
it
is
engendered
of
vapours
raised
from
the
bloud
,
and
waterishnesse
of
the
veins
and
arteries
of
the
heart
,
and
condensed
by
the
respective
coldnesse
of
the
membrane
,
and
by
his
meane
the
peritonaeum
and
the
pleura
seeme
alwaies
bedewed
with
moysture
.
It
seemeth
that
the
first
beginning
of
it
is
a
seminall
humidity
,
and
that
is
maintained
afterward
by
the
vapours
.
Sometimes
also
there
The
bloudy
water
in
the
capacity
of
the
brest
.
is
contained
in
the
capacity
of
the
brest
,
a
bloody
water
to
moysten
,
and
temper
the
heat
of
the
lungs
.
It
is
caused
partly
of
the
vapours
raised
from
the
vessels
,
partly
of
that
portion
of
drink
,
which
passeth
to
the
lungs
:
and
by
reason
of
this
,
water
and
bloud
did
flow
from
the
side
of
our
Saviour
,
pierced
.
CAP.
IIII.
Of
the
truncke
ascending
from
the
Vena
cava
.
NOw
the
parts
contained
in
the
brest
,
are
either
vasa
or
viscera
,
the
vessels
or
the
entrals
.
The
vessels
are
in
number
foure
,
the
vena
cava
,
the
vena
arterialis
,
the
arteria
venosa
,
and
the
aorta
or
arteria
magna
.
The
first
is
the
The
Vena
cava
.
vena
cava
or
magna
,
because
the
hollownesse
of
it
is
great
.
It
hath
its
beginning
from
the
liver
.
The
orifice
of
it
is
three
times
as
large
as
that
of
the
aorta
:
being
received
by
the
right
care
of
the
heart
,
it
is
expanded
into
the
whole
right
ventricle
of
the
same
.
About
the
orifice
of
it
Its
values
.
are
placed
three
values
called
trifulcae
or
tri●uspides
:
because
arising
from
a
large
foot
,
they
end
into
a
narrow
top
representing
barbed
arrowes
.
Their
situation
is
from
without
inward
,
so
that
the
bloud
may
be
let
in
,
but
not
returne
.
They
proceed
from
a
membranous
circle
,
annexed
to
the
orifice
:
They
cleave
to
the
septum
of
the
heart
,
towards
the
point
of
it
bee
strong
fibres
ending
in
round
caruncules
.
If
you
would
see
these
as
the
rest
of
the
values
,
cut
transversly
the
ventricles
of
the
heart
neere
to
the
basis
,
and
then
they
will
appeare
.
It
hath
two
trunkes
,
The
trunk
ascending
.
one
descending
,
and
this
is
that
which
is
caused
of
a
number
of
small
veins
,
appearing
in
the
hollow
part
of
the
liver
,
which
meet
about
the
middle
of
it
in
one
trunck
still
decreasing
in
number
,
and
increasing
in
bignesse
.
The
other
ascending
,
this
is
procured
by
a
number
of
small
veins
,
springing
from
the
convex
part
of
the
liver
,
which
end
in
like
manner
into
one
trunck
about
the
middle
of
it
.
This
is
bigger
than
the
descending
,
because
all
the
upper
parts
are
fed
by
this
onely
;
whereas
most
of
the
parts
contained
in
the
abdomen
,
are
nourished
by
the
vena
portae
.
Although
it
bee
not
The
laterall
sprigs
of
the
trunk
ascending
.
divided
into
branches
untill
it
come
to
the
throat
;
yet
it
doth
send
forth
sundry
sprigs
from
the
sides
.
The
first
is
called
phrenica
,
1.
Phrenica
.
one
in
each
side
It
is
inserted
into
the
diaphragma
,
which
is
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
by
a
number
of
twigs
,
and
from
thence
it
bestoweth
twigs
upon
the
pericardium
,
and
mediastinum
.
The
second
is
called
Coronaria
,
so
called
because
like
a
garland
it
compasseth
the
basis
of
the
heart
.
It
sendeth
sundry
twigges
to
the
outer
parts
of
the
heart
;
but
chiefly
to
the
left
:
because
it
needeth
greater
store
of
nourishment
,
by
reason
of
its
stronger
motion
.
This
hath
a
value
which
hindereth
the
returne
of
the
bloud
,
to
the
vena
cava
.
This
springeth
from
the
cava
,
before
it
enter
into
the
heart
,
and
the
bloud
is
somewhat
thick
,
and
not
attenuat
in
the
ventricles
of
the
heart
;
for
the
substance
of
the
heart
,
being
hard
,
and
firme
,
was
to
be
nourished
by
bloud
somewhat
grosse
.
The
third
is
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
3.
Vena
sine
pari
.
or
sine
pari
,
without
a
mate
,
because
it
hath
not
a
fellow
as
other
veins
have
in
the
left
side
,
if
you
except
those
beasts
which
chew
the
cud
.
This
springeth
from
the
cava
,
as
soone
as
it
is
come
out
of
the
pericardium
.
It
passeth
out
of
the
hinder
and
right
part
of
the
vena
cava
,
about
the
fift
vertebra
of
the
brest
.
It
doth
not
descend
straight
way
:
But
comming
a
little
forward
,
it
returneth
towards
the
spina
.
When
it
is
come
to
the
eighth
or
ninth
rib
above
the
spina
,
it
is
divided
into
two
branches
,
to
wit
,
the
right
and
the
left
:
Then
passing
by
the
division
of
the
midrife
,
which
is
between
the
two
productions
of
it
,
they
are
spread
thorow
the
abdomen
.
Of
these
two
,
the
left
is
inserted
into
the
left
emulgent
.
By
this
way
Fallopius
By
which
way
matters
in
the
brest
are
discharged
.
will
have
watrish
,
pu●ulent
and
bloudy
substances
to
be
discharged
,
which
sometimes
are
contained
in
the
brest
;
while
these
branches
march
downeward
:
In
each
side
ten
sprigs
bud
out
,
which
march
thorow
so
many
distances
of
so
many
of
the
inferior
ribs
.
In
the
lower
part
of
the
rib
,
there
is
a
groop
to
receive
the
sprig
.
Wherefore
when
you
make
incision
in
an
empiena
,
come
not
neere
to
this
part
.
From
this
vein
other
small
twigs
also
proceed
;
which
afford
nourishment
to
the
spinalus
medulla
.
These
are
called
costales
inferiures
,
or
the
lower
intercostals
.
The
vena
sine
pari
thus
being
framed
,
the
cava
ascendeth
to
the
jugulum
,
strengthned
by
the
media
stinum
and
the
thymus
;
which
is
placed
in
the
uppermost
part
of
the
brest
.
Here
the
vena
cava
The
divarication
of
the
vena
cava
.
is
parted
into
2.
remarkable
branches
:
From
whence
all
those
veins
spring
,
which
are
sent
either
to
the
head
or
armes
.
One
branch
marcheth
to
the
right
,
another
to
the
left
side
,
while
they
remaine
within
the
brest
,
they
are
called
subclavii
,
because
they
march
under
the
cannell
bones
;
but
when
they
are
come
to
the
arme
pit
,
they
are
called
axillares
.
Before
they
come
to
Sprigs
proceeding
from
the
cava
within
the
brest
.
the
arme
pit
,
sundry
sprigs
spring
from
them
.
The
first
is
intercostalis
superior
,
1.
Intercostalis
superior
.
this
ariseth
from
the
root
of
the
divarication
,
and
passing
by
the
roots
of
two
ribs
,
bestoweth
twigs
upon
the
distances
of
the
two
upper
ribs
,
as
the
vena
sine
part
did
:
there
is
one
in
each
side
.
The
second
is
called
mammaria
;
2.
Mammaria
.
this
marcheth
forwards
towards
the
upper
part
of
the
bone
of
the
brest
.
From
thence
it
goeth
downe
by
the
sides
of
it
,
and
when
it
is
come
to
the
cartilago
mucronata
,
about
the
sides
of
it
,
it
passeth
out
of
the
brest
,
and
marcheth
by
a
straight
way
under
the
straight
muscles
to
the
navill
,
where
it
is
joyned
with
the
vena
epigastrica
ascendens
by
inosculation
:
which
is
the
cause
of
that
great
consent
,
which
is
betweene
the
paps
and
the
matrix
.
This
before
it
leave
the
brest
,
it
bestoweth
one
branch
upon
the
cartilaginous
distances
of
seven
of
the
costae
verae
,
where
the
sprigs
of
the
vena
sine
pari
end
.
From
these
branches
proceed
some
other
remarkable
twigs
,
which
are
bestowed
upon
those
muscles
,
which
are
seated
upon
the
brest
,
and
the
dugs
.
The
third
is
called
Mediastina
,
3.
Mediastina
.
because
it
is
bestowed
upon
the
mediastinum
together
with
the
left
nerve
of
the
midrife
,
according
to
the
length
of
it
.
The
fourth
is
called
Cervicalis
or
vertebralis
.
4.
Cervicalis
.
It
is
large
in
each
side
,
marching
upwards
obliquely
towards
the
back
part
,
it
commeth
to
the
transverse
processes
of
the
vertebrae
of
the
neck
,
where
passing
thorow
the
holes
of
them
,
it
bestoweth
branches
upon
the
muscles
,
which
lye
above
the
vertebrae
.
The
fifth
is
called
Muscula
inferior
,
5.
Muscula
inferior
.
because
it
is
spent
upon
the
lower
muscles
of
the
neck
,
which
stretch
out
the
neck
and
head
.
The
sixth
is
the
internall
jugular
,
6.
The
internall
jugular
.
this
ariseth
where
the
cannell
bone
is
articulat
with
the
sternum
.
This
joyned
with
the
nerve
recurrent
,
and
the
soporall
artery
,
marcheth
by
the
side
of
the
wind-pipe
,
to
the
throat
.
The
seventh
is
the
externall
jugular
,
this
marching
up
under
the
skin
,
and
the
qoadrat
muscle
,
which
pulleth
downe
the
cheeks
,
commeth
to
the
eare
.
This
in
beasts
is
bigger
than
the
internall
:
otherwise
than
it
is
in
man
.
CAP.
V.
Of
Vena
arterialis
,
and
arteria
venalis
.
THe
second
vessell
in
the
brest
is
Vena
arterialis
.
Vena
arterialis
.
It
is
a
vein
from
its
office
:
for
it
carrieth
naturall
blood
to
the
lungs
by
the
right
side
of
the
wind
pipe
:
It
is
called
an
artery
,
because
the
coat
of
it
is
double
,
not
single
as
that
of
veins
.
It
doth
spring
from
the
upper
part
of
the
right
ventricle
of
the
heart
,
and
is
implanted
into
the
substance
of
the
lungs
by
the
right
side
of
the
wind-pipe
.
The
third
vessell
is
arteria
venalis
.
Arteria
venalis
.
It
is
called
an
artery
,
because
is
carrieth
arteriall
bloud
;
but
a
vein
,
because
it
hath
a
single
coat
as
a
vein
.
It
ariseth
from
the
upper
part
of
the
left
ventricle
of
the
heart
,
and
is
implanted
into
the
substance
of
the
lungs
by
the
left
side
of
the
wind-pipe
.
The
Vena
arterialis
The
values
of
these
two
vessels
.
hath
three
values
called
Sigmoides
,
from
the
figure
of
the
great
sigma
,
which
answereth
the
Latine
S.
the
figure
is
this
C.
They
looke
from
within
outwards
,
to
let
out
the
bloud
;
but
to
hinder
the
returne
of
the
same
.
The
Arteria
venalis
hath
two
values
called
mitrales
,
because
they
are
like
a
Bishops
Miter
.
They
looke
from
without
inward
,
to
let
in
bloud
carried
from
the
vena
arterialis
.
They
are
bigger
than
those
of
vena
cava
,
and
have
longer
filaments
,
and
to
strengthen
them
many
fleshy
snippets
are
joyned
to
them
.
It
hath
two
values
only
,
that
the
fuliginous
vapours
might
the
more
readily
be
discharged
.
It
hath
also
but
a
single
thin
coat
,
partly
for
the
same
purpose
,
partly
because
the
bloud
sent
from
the
vena
arteriosa
is
cooled
by
the
bronchia
of
the
lungs
before
it
entereth
into
arteria
venalis
it
needeth
not
so
thick
a
coat
as
an
artery
,
and
because
veins
only
carry
in
bloud
,
and
arteries
carry
out
,
therefore
arteria
venalis
is
placed
in
the
left
ventricle
,
and
vena
arterialis
in
the
right
.
Both
these
vessels
not
farre
from
their
beginning
,
are
divided
into
two
branches
,
whereof
the
one
passeth
to
the
right
part
of
the
lungs
,
and
the
other
to
the
left
;
and
each
of
these
is
subdivided
into
other
branches
,
untill
at
the
last
they
end
in
small
threeds
.
The
greater
branches
accompany
one
another
,
so
that
the
vein
still
marcheth
with
the
arteriae
joyned
together
by
many
inosculations
or
anastomoses
.
Betweene
them
the
branches
of
aspera
arteria
march
.
These
vessels
are
great
,
because
the
lungs
by
reason
of
their
perpetuall
motion
require
much
nourishment
.
First
,
the
bloud
is
How
the
bloud
is
carried
to
the
left
ventricle
of
the
heart
.
carried
into
the
lungs
by
vena
arterialis
,
and
from
hence
to
arteria
venalis
,
by
sundry
anastomoses
,
and
from
hence
to
the
left
ventricle
of
the
heart
.
Where
being
made
spirituous
,
it
is
sent
by
the
aorta
,
to
impart
life
to
the
whole
body
.
One
thing
is
to
be
noted
,
that
no
aire
in
its
proper
substance
is
carried
to
the
heart
:
for
the
bloud
contained
in
these
two
vessels
,
is
sufficiently
cooled
by
the
bronchia
passing
between
them
.
The
bloud
is
cooled
,
How
the
bloud
is
cooled
.
First
,
by
staying
in
the
lungs
while
it
is
in
passing
.
Secondly
,
by
touching
the
bronchia
cooled
by
the
attraction
of
fresh
aire
:
And
thirdly
,
by
the
continuall
motion
of
the
lungs
.
One
thing
is
to
be
noted
,
that
in
arteria
venosa
a
little
below
the
values
there
is
found
a
little
value
ever
open
.
It
being
removed
,
there
appeareth
a
hole
,
by
the
which
the
blood
passeth
freely
from
the
vena
cava
to
it
,
and
returneth
by
reason
of
this
anastomosis
;
that
the
bloud
in
the
veins
may
be
animat
.
CAP.
VI.
Of
the
great
artery
,
and
first
of
the
trunke
ascending
of
the
same
.
THe
fourth
vessell
is
the
great
artery
called
aorta
;
because
it
receiveth
the
aire
.
It
springeth
from
the
upper
part
of
the
left
ventricle
of
the
heart
,
where
it
is
largest
and
hardest
.
Before
it
come
out
of
Coronaria
arteria
.
the
Pericardium
,
it
sendeth
two
small
twigs
,
from
each
side
one
:
which
compasse
the
basis
of
the
heart
like
a
garland
,
and
send
down
according
to
the
length
of
the
heart
other
twigs
:
These
are
called
Coronariae
.
These
twigs
are
more
in
number
,
and
larger
about
the
left
ventricle
than
the
right
,
because
it
requireth
greater
plenty
of
nourishment
,
by
reason
of
its
stronger
motion
,
which
digesteth
much
bloud
.
It
is
placed
between
The
situation
of
the
aorta
.
the
wind
pipe
,
and
the
vena
cava
,
tied
to
the
mouth
of
the
stomack
,
passing
under
the
trunk
of
vena
arteriosa
upward
,
Its
trunkes
.
when
it
hath
pierced
the
Pericardium
,
it
is
divided
into
two
trunks
;
whereof
the
one
is
called
truncus
ascendens
,
the
ascending
trunk
:
The
other
descendens
,
the
descending
.
Of
these
two
the
descending
is
largest
,
because
it
ministreth
life
to
more
parts
.
This
ascending
trunk
The
branches
of
the
trunk
ascending
.
before
it
passe
to
the
armes
,
is
divided
into
two
branches
,
whereof
one
passeth
to
the
right
,
the
other
towards
the
left
arme
;
they
are
called
subclavii
rami
,
because
they
march
under
the
canell
bones
.
When
they
are
gone
out
of
the
brest
,
they
are
called
Axillares
.
From
both
the
lower
and
upper
part
of
both
these
branches
,
sundry
sprigs
doe
spring
.
From
the
upper
part
From
the
upper
part
.
proceedeth
intercostalis
superior
,
which
bestoweth
twigs
upon
the
distances
of
the
uppermost
foure
ribs
.
From
whence
others
are
sent
to
the
adjacent
muscles
and
the
spinalis
medulla
.
1
From
the
lower
springeth
From
the
lower
part
.
that
branch
,
which
is
called
Cervicalis
,
but
more
fitly
Vertebralis
;
for
it
springeth
behind
where
the
vertebrae
;
from
thence
marching
upwards
it
bestoweth
twigs
upon
the
spinalis
medulla
,
which
enter
by
the
passages
,
by
the
which
the
nerves
,
as
also
upon
the
muscles
,
which
are
placed
in
the
hinder
part
of
the
neck
,
and
at
the
last
entereth
into
the
Cranium
,
by
that
hole
,
by
the
which
the
spinalis
medulla
descendeth
from
the
braine
.
This
with
its
fellow
when
it
is
come
to
the
sell
of
the
wedge-like
bone
on
each
side
of
it
,
betweene
the
first
and
second
paire
of
sinews
,
having
beene
divided
,
cause
Plexus
choroides
.
2
The
second
,
the
Arteria
mammaria
,
which
accompanying
the
Vena
mammaria
is
joyned
with
the
epigastrica
arteria
,
ascending
by
inosculation
about
the
navell
.
3
The
third
is
that
called
Muscula
,
and
is
distributed
upon
the
muscles
of
the
neck
.
4
The
fourth
is
the
Soporall
,
one
on
each
side
;
so
called
,
because
if
they
be
stopped
,
sleep
doth
immediatly
follow
.
These
soporall
arteries
when
they
are
come
to
the
throat
,
they
are
divided
in
two
branches
,
to
wit
,
the
externall
,
which
is
lesser
,
and
the
internall
,
which
is
larger
.
The
externall
bestowed
twigs
upon
the
muscles
of
the
face
,
upon
the
roots
of
all
the
teeth
of
the
lower
jaw
,
having
entered
into
the
cavity
of
the
mandible
,
and
going
out
upon
the
chin
.
The
internall
branch
when
it
hath
about
the
throat
,
it
hath
bestowed
twigs
upon
the
tongue
and
larynx
,
about
the
lower
part
of
the
skull
,
it
is
divided
into
two
branches
,
whereof
the
lesser
and
hindermost
accompanying
the
branch
of
the
internall
jugular
marcheth
toward
the
hindermost
part
of
the
skull
,
and
entering
at
the
second
hole
of
the
nowle
entereth
into
the
hollownesse
of
the
dura
mater
.
The
formost
and
the
largest
,
when
it
hath
entered
into
the
cavity
of
the
skull
thorow
it
proper
hole
in
the
parietall
bone
,
and
is
come
to
the
sell
of
the
wedge-like
bone
,
it
maketh
rete
mirabile
,
which
in
beasts
is
large
,
but
in
man
very
obscure
.
CAP.
VII
.
Of
the
descending
trunke
of
the
aorta
.
THE
descending
trunke
of
the
aorta
about
the
fifth
vertebra
of
the
breast
bending
towards
the
left
side
marcheth
downwards
towards
the
last
vertebra
of
the
loynes
.
In
this
march
it
sendeth
forth
sundry
branches
,
which
are
these
:
1.
Intercostall
inferior
The
branches
of
the
trunke
descending
.
arteries
in
number
eight
.
2.
Phraenicae
two
.
3.
Caeliaca
one
.
4.
Mesenterica
superior
.
5.
Emulgentes
two
.
6.
Spermaticae
two
.
7.
Mesenterica
inferior
.
8.
Lumbares
.
The
inferior
intercostall
1.
The
Inferior
intercostals
.
arteries
,
accompanying
the
veins
and
nerves
of
the
same
denomination
march
according
to
the
length
of
the
lower
part
of
the
ribs
,
where
there
is
a
hollownesse
to
receive
them
,
and
in
the
true
ribs
end
where
the
cartilages
begin
;
but
in
the
short
ribs
they
goe
a
little
further
,
even
to
the
sides
of
the
lower
belly
.
These
send
sprigs
by
the
holes
of
the
nerves
to
the
marrow
of
the
back
,
and
to
the
muscles
which
rest
upon
the
vertebrae
of
the
back
.
These
not
only
afford
By
what
way
quittour
and
water
is
sent
from
the
br
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
the
〈◊〉
.
spirits
and
bloud
,
to
the
intercostall
muscles
;
but
carry
also
quittour
and
water
gathered
in
the
cavity
of
the
brest
,
sent
by
the
trunk
of
the
aorta
to
the
bladder
,
by
the
emulgent
arteries
,
according
to
Spigelius
lib.
6.
cap.
4.
whereas
Fallopius
will
have
these
m●ters
to
be
sent
by
vena
sintpari
;
but
this
a
shorter
way
.
Phrenicae
are
two
,
2.
Phrenicae
.
one
on
each
side
:
they
spring
from
the
trunk
as
soone
as
it
is
come
out
of
the
cavity
of
the
brest
,
and
being
spread
into
many
twigs
,
whereof
the
most
are
bestowed
upon
the
lower
part
of
the
midrife
,
where
the
vertebra
of
the
back
are
;
and
some
also
upon
the
upper
part
,
which
afterward
passe
to
the
pericardium
,
where
it
cleaveth
to
the
midrife
.
Caeliaca
is
one
,
so
called
3.
Caeliaca
.
because
it
sendeth
twigs
to
the
stomack
.
This
springeth
from
the
fore-part
of
the
trunk
.
This
bestoweth
branches
upon
the
stomack
,
liver
,
gall
,
caule
,
the
duodenum
,
the
beginning
of
the
jejunum
,
to
a
part
of
Colon
,
to
the
Pancreas
,
and
spleene
.
Mesenterica
superior
doth
arise
a
little
below
the
caeliaca
,
accompanying
the
vena
mesaraica
.
It
bestoweth
many
twigs
upon
the
hungry
and
ilium
gut
,
as
also
upon
that
part
of
Colon
,
which
lieth
betweene
the
hollow
part
of
the
liver
,
and
the
right
kidny
.
So
that
this
branch
is
bestowed
upon
the
upper
part
of
the
mesentery
.
5
The
Emulgent
arteries
are
two
;
the
right
and
the
left
.
They
spring
from
both
the
sides
of
the
trunk
under
the
former
,
where
the
first
and
second
vertebra
of
the
loines
are
coupled
by
a
ligament
.
The
left
is
lower
than
the
right
.
These
when
they
are
come
to
the
kidnies
are
divided
into
two
branches
,
which
are
inserted
into
the
cavities
of
the
kidnies
,
and
by
innumerable
small
twigs
are
spent
upon
the
substance
of
the
kidnies
.
The
use
of
these
,
besides
the
common
,
is
to
discharge
the
serosity
of
the
arteries
,
whereof
they
have
great
store
.
6
Spermatica
or
seminales
,
the
Seminary
;
they
are
in
like
manner
two
,
which
spring
from
the
forepart
of
the
trunk
.
The
left
artery
doth
not
spring
from
the
left
emulgent
artery
as
the
vein
doth
.
These
marching
downward
,
accompany
the
veins
of
their
side
.
In
men
they
are
carried
to
the
stones
by
the
productions
of
the
peritonaeum
;
but
in
women
when
they
are
come
neere
to
the
stones
,
they
are
divided
in
two
branches
,
whereof
the
one
is
bestowed
upon
the
stones
,
and
the
other
upon
the
bottome
of
the
matrix
,
in
the
sides
of
it
.
Mesenterica
inferior
,
it
7
springeth
about
the
os
sacrum
,
from
the
trunk
a
little
above
before
it
sendeth
forth
the
rami
iliaci
.
It
is
bestowed
upon
the
left
part
of
the
Colon
,
and
the
rectum
,
and
accompanieth
the
Hemorrhidicall
veins
to
the
anus
.
Lumbares
rami
,
the
8
Loyne
branches
,
in
number
foure
;
They
spring
from
the
back-part
of
the
descending
trunk
of
the
aorta
.
These
passe
to
the
vertebrae
of
the
loynes
,
and
their
marrow
by
their
holes
,
as
also
to
the
adjacent
muscles
.
Some
things
here
offer
themselves
to
be
observed
.
1.
That
when
either
the
colicke
is
changed
into
the
gout
,
or
contrariwise
the
gout
into
the
colick
;
if
the
lest
happen
,
then
the
humours
are
sent
from
the
crurall
arteries
to
the
trunke
,
and
from
thence
to
the
mesentericall
branches
of
the
arteries
;
and
from
thence
to
the
guts
.
If
the
first
happen
,
then
the
humours
passe
the
contrary
way
,
Read
Hip.
6.
Epid.
Sect.
4.
2.
If
the
colick
turn
either
to
a
palsey
,
or
falling
sicknesse
,
as
it
may
fall
out
,
according
to
aegenet
.
lib.
3.
cap.
43.
then
the
humour
doth
returne
from
the
Colon
by
the
mesentericall
arteries
,
to
the
trunke
,
and
from
hence
to
the
Lumbares
,
which
being
filled
compresse
the
adjacent
nerves
:
from
whence
difficulty
of
going
insueth
;
which
may
be
called
an
imperfect
palsey
.
If
the
falling
sicknesse
be
pr●cured
,
the
humour
is
sent
to
the
groyne
arteries
,
and
thence
to
the
braine
.
3.
Clysters
may
purge
the
whole
body
:
for
the
clyster
moistning
the
whole
Colon
,
may
by
the
twigs
of
the
arteries
draw
noysome
humours
from
the
trunk
,
and
when
purgation
is
caused
by
anointing
the
navill
(
which
often
falled
out
in
using
the
unction
for
the
pox
,
)
or
vomiting
by
ministring
a
clyster
,
wherein
white
hellebore
is
,
first
the
arteries
draw
the
force
of
the
medicaments
,
and
this
same
faculty
againt
doth
purge
by
the
arteries
.
9.
Arteriae
sacrae
,
or
9
those
branches
which
goe
to
the
os
sacrum
.
They
spring
from
the
lower
part
of
the
trunk
,
before
it
sendeth
out
the
Rami
ili●ci
.
They
are
somewhat
large
.
They
marching
downeward
,
and
leaning
upon
the
os
sacrum
,
enter
into
the
holes
of
it
,
and
so
passe
to
the
marrow
and
hinder
part
of
the
same
.
By
these
the
matter
which
causeth
the
colick
may
passe
to
procure
the
palsey
of
the
legs
.
Iliace
arteriae
,
these
arising
10
below
the
former
about
the
lower
vertibra
of
the
loynes
,
and
mount
above
the
vein
,
lest
it
should
be
hurt
by
the
hardnesse
of
the
os
sacrum
,
in
their
continuall
motion
.
They
being
in
number
two
large
branches
,
called
Arteriae
iliaca
or
flancke
arteries
,
and
marching
downward
to
the
thigh
obliquely
they
represent
the
Greeke
Y.
inverted
.
These
a
little
below
the
division
of
the
trunk
are
subdivided
into
two
branches
,
to
wit
,
the
internall
or
lesser
Iliaca
,
and
the
externall
or
greater
.
The
internall
hath
two
branches
:
The
one
is
called
Glutaea
,
and
with
a
vein
of
the
same
denomination
,
and
is
bestowed
upon
the
muscles
,
which
make
up
the
buttocks
:
The
other
is
called
Hypogastrica
.
This
is
large
,
this
being
carried
directly
to
the
lower
part
of
the
os
sacrum
,
in
men
it
bestoweth
twigs
to
the
bottom
and
neck
of
the
bladder
,
and
to
the
straight
Gut
;
but
in
women
wherein
it
is
larger
,
it
sendeth
plenty
of
twigs
upon
the
bottome
and
neck
of
the
matrix
besides
the
former
parts
.
The
externall
or
greater
hath
two
branches
.
The
first
is
called
Epigastrica
.
It
springeth
from
the
outer
part
of
the
artery
a
little
before
it
passe
thorow
the
Peritonaeum
,
and
turning
upwards
it
mounteth
upwards
by
the
inner
side
of
the
straight
muscle
of
the
belly
:
and
about
the
navill
it
is
inosculat
with
the
arteries
descending
.
The
second
is
called
pudenda
,
this
is
but
a
small
branch
,
and
when
it
is
come
out
of
the
Peritonaeum
,
it
passeth
obliquely
by
the
joyning
of
the
os
pubis
,
and
is
bestowed
upon
the
skin
of
the
secret
parts
.
One
thing
is
to
be
noted
,
A
note
.
that
the
Arteria
umbilicalis
springeth
from
the
internall
Iliaca
,
and
going
alongst
the
great
artery
,
is
firmly
tyed
to
the
bladder
by
strong
membranes
.
When
the
child
is
in
the
belly
,
it
is
hollow
;
but
without
hollownes
when
the
infant
is
come
.
About
the
orifice
of
The
values
.
these
vessels
.
II.
values
are
to
be
seene
,
if
the
ventricles
of
the
heart
be
dissected
transverse
neere
to
the
bajis
.
Of
these
some
are
called
trisulcae
,
and
resemble
a
barbed
arrow
,
some
semilunares
or
Sigmoides
,
because
they
resemble
a
halfe
moone
,
or
the
Greeke
leetter
called
C.
Those
bend
inwards
,
because
they
are
set
before
the
vessels
which
carry
in
bloud
.
These
bend
outward
,
because
they
are
appointed
for
the
vessels
which
carry
out
the
bloud
.
The
Vena
cava
hath
three
Trisulcae
;
but
the
Arteria
venosa
two
.
The
Aorta
,
and
vena
arteriosa
have
three
Sigmoides
.
So
much
then
concerning
the
vessels
of
the
Brest
:
now
follow
the
entrals
.
CAP.
VIII
.
Of
the
Heart
.
OF
these
there
are
foure
:
the
Heart
,
the
Lungs
,
the
Wind-pipe
,
and
part
of
the
Gullet
.
In
the
explication
of
the
heart
;
First
,
the
Swadler
is
to
bee
considered
,
and
then
the
substance
of
the
heart
it selfe
.
The
Swadler
,
called
Pericardium
or
Capsula
cordis
,
is
a
membrane
wrapping
in
the
whole
heart
,
having
the
figure
of
the
same
,
having
such
distance
from
the
heart
,
and
to
containe
the
watrish
humour
.
It
is
perforat
in
five
places
for
the
comming
in
,
and
going
out
of
the
vena
cava
,
and
for
egresse
of
the
other
three
.
The
substance
of
it
is
thicke
and
firme
.
The
outer
superficies
is
fibrous
;
but
the
inner
,
smooth
and
slippery
.
It
is
tyed
to
the
Mediastinum
,
and
adjacent
parts
by
sundry
fibres
.
It
doth
cleave
firmly
to
the
sinewy
circle
of
the
midrife
;
but
not
so
in
dogs
.
It
hath
its
beginning
from
the
tunicles
,
which
compasse
the
vessels
which
proceed
from
the
pleura
;
for
between
the
heart
and
the
pericardium
,
the
membrane
from
the
pleura
is
wanting
.
It
containeth
a
watrish
substance
,
not
sharpe
for
the
refrigeration
and
humefaction
of
the
heart
:
As
in
the
cavity
of
the
brest
a
moysture
is
found
like
water
and
bloud
,
mingled
together
.
So
from
the
side
of
our
Saviour
pierced
,
water
and
bloud
did
flow
.
The
Pericardium
hath
veins
from
the
phrenicae
and
axillar
.
No
arteries
appeare
;
because
it
is
neere
enough
to
the
heart
.
It
hath
small
nerves
from
the
left
recurrent
.
As
for
the
heart
,
the
substance
of
it
is
compact
and
firme
,
and
full
of
fibres
of
all
sorts
.
The
upper
part
is
called
hath
a
small
nerve
from
the
sixt
conjugation
for
feeling
;
but
not
motion
,
for
it
moveth
of
it selfe
:
of
all
the
parts
of
the
body
,
it
is
the
hottest
;
for
it
is
the
well
spring
of
life
,
and
by
arteries
communicateth
it
to
the
rest
of
the
body
.
The
heart
hath
two
motions
,
Diastole
,
and
Systole
.
In
Diastole
or
dilatation
of
the
heart
,
the
conus
is
drawne
from
the
basis
,
to
draw
bloud
by
the
cava
to
the
right
ventricle
,
and
aire
by
arteria
venosa
to
the
left
ventricle
.
In
Systole
or
contraction
,
on
,
the
conus
is
drawne
to
the
basis
.
First
,
that
the
vitall
spirit
may
be
thrust
from
the
left
ventricle
of
the
heart
into
the
aorta
.
Secondly
,
that
the
arteriall
bloud
may
bee
thrust
into
the
lungs
,
by
arteria
venalis
.
Thirdly
,
that
the
bloud
may
bee
pressed
to
the
lungs
,
in
the
right
ventricle
by
vena
arterialis
.
The
parts
of
the
heart
are
either
,
externall
or
internall
.
The
externall
are
the
eares
.
The
eares
are
annexed
to
the
firme
substance
of
the
heart
about
the
basis
of
it
,
before
the
mouths
of
the
vessels
.
They
are
of
a
nervous
substance
for
strength
,
yet
thin
and
soft
,
for
the
easier
contraction
and
dilatation
:
the
left
is
thicker
than
the
right
.
When
they
are
distended
,
they
are
smooth
;
but
being
contracted
they
are
wrinckled
.
They
are
storehouses
of
the
heart
:
for
they
first
receive
the
aire
and
bloud
,
lest
they
immediatly
rushing
into
the
heart
might
offend
it
,
and
they
strengthen
the
vessels
.
These
eares
are
two
in
number
:
the
right
which
is
greatest
,
this
is
before
the
vena
cava
,
and
the
left
the
lesser
,
before
the
arteria
venosa
.
They
are
called
eares
not
from
the
office
of
hearing
,
but
from
the
likenesse
;
they
representing
the
figure
of
an
eare
.
Death
approaching
,
when
the
heart
is
immoveable
,
they
move
;
so
we
see
that
a
small
gale
of
wind
,
which
moveth
not
the
tree
moveth
the
leaves
.
The
internall
parts
of
the
heart
are
the
ventricles
or
cavities
,
and
the
septum
.
The
ventricles
are
in
number
two
,
the
right
and
the
left
.
The
right
is
larger
than
the
left
,
yet
the
left
hath
thicker
sides
,
and
within
is
more
unequall
than
the
right
.
The
right
ventricle
receiveth
bloud
from
the
vena
cava
,
to
be
sent
by
vena
arteriosa
to
the
lungs
,
and
reacheth
not
to
the
conus
.
The
left
ventricle
is
not
so
wide
as
the
right
:
yet
the
fleshy
circumference
is
thrice
as
thick
as
that
of
the
right
.
It
doth
elaborat
the
vitall
spirit
of
the
blood
and
aire
drawne
in
by
arteria
venosa
.
The
septum
,
so
called
because
it
separateth
the
right
ventricle
from
the
left
,
is
that
thick
and
fleshy
substance
set
between
the
two
cavities
.
Riolan
will
have
the
matter
of
the
vitall
bloud
to
passe
thorow
the
holes
or
porosites
of
it
,
from
the
right
to
the
left
ventricle
,
but
that
hardly
any
instrument
can
shew
them
:
First
,
because
they
goe
not
straight
,
but
wreathed
.
Secondly
,
because
they
are
exceeding
narrow
in
the
end
.
He
affirmeth
that
they
are
more
easily
discerned
in
an
Oxe
heart
boiled
.
CAP.
IX
.
Of
the
Lungs
,
Wind-pipe
,
and
Gullet
.
AS
for
the
lungs
,
the
substance
of
them
in
Infants
,
whilest
they
are
in
the
wombe
,
is
red
and
compact
;
but
after
birth
because
they
begin
to
move
with
the
heart
by
heat
and
motion
,
this
substance
beginneth
to
be
more
loose
and
spongious
,
and
of
a
pale
yellow
colour
,
that
they
may
the
more
easily
rise
,
and
fall
to
receive
the
aire
,
and
expell
superfluities
.
The
substance
of
the
lungs
is
covered
with
a
membrane
communicated
by
the
pleura
:
for
the
vessels
as
soone
as
they
enter
into
the
substance
of
the
lungs
,
they
leave
the
coat
which
they
borrowed
of
the
pleura
,
and
leave
it
for
covering
of
the
lungs
.
This
membrane
is
porous
,
to
give
way
to
impurities
,
contained
in
the
cavity
of
the
brest
,
to
passe
thorow
the
loose
substance
of
the
lungs
,
to
be
discharged
by
expectoration
.
When
the
lungs
are
blowne
up
,
they
fill
the
whole
cavity
of
the
brest
.
In
figure
they
are
like
to
an
Oxes
hoofe
.
The
outer
part
is
gibbous
;
the
inward
hollow
:
the
lungs
are
divided
into
the
right
and
left
part
,
each
of
these
hath
two
lobes
,
seldome
three
,
with
the
which
as
with
fingers
they
embrace
the
heart
.
Nature
hath
ordained
this
division
,
that
if
one
side
of
the
lungs
should
be
hurt
,
the
other
might
discharge
the
office
.
The
lungs
and
brest
are
divided
by
the
benefit
of
the
mediastinum
,
which
is
a
double
membrane
framed
of
the
pleura
;
for
the
pleura
beginning
at
the
back
,
passeth
to
the
sternum
by
the
sides
:
when
it
is
come
to
the
middle
of
the
sternum
,
it
directly
from
thence
passes
to
the
back
againe
.
The
cavity
which
the
reduplication
of
the
pleura
leaveth
here
is
above
wider
,
but
towards
the
back
narrower
and
narrower
,
untill
the
membranes
be
united
.
Penetrating
wounds
going
no
further
than
this
cavity
,
are
not
deadly
.
The
mediastinum
is
softer
than
the
pleura
.
The
lungs
are
joyned
to
the
sternum
by
the
mediastinum
,
behind
the
vertebra
of
the
back
:
towards
the
sides
to
the
pleura
by
fibres
sometimes
they
are
tyed
,
which
causeth
difficulty
of
breathing
.
It
is
joyned
to
the
heart
by
vena
arteriosa
,
and
arteria
venosa
.
The
lungs
have
three
vessels
,
vena
arteriosa
,
arteria
venosa
,
and
trachaea
arteria
:
these
two
marching
together
have
betweene
them
inserted
a
branch
of
the
trachaea
arteria
,
carying
aire
to
coole
them
.
On
this
is
to
be
noted
,
that
the
vessels
of
the
lungs
differ
from
those
in
other
parts
of
the
body
:
for
the
veins
have
the
coats
of
arteries
,
that
no
alimentary
moysture
should
breathe
out
:
and
the
arteries
have
the
coats
of
veins
,
that
the
vitall
bloud
might
the
more
speedily
passe
,
with
the
fuliginous
excrements
,
and
the
pure
aire
come
in
more
plentifully
.
The
lungs
have
no
faculty
of
themselves
to
move
,
but
follow
the
motion
of
the
brest
,
to
shunne
vacuity
;
for
when
the
brest
doth
dilate
it selfe
,
the
lungs
are
filled
with
aire
and
raised
up
;
and
when
the
brest
contracteth
it selfe
they
fall
.
That
the
lungs
follow
the
motion
of
the
brest
,
this
experience
sheweth
:
Let
one
receive
a
penetrating
wound
in
the
brest
,
if
the
aire
enter
in
,
the
lungs
cannot
move
,
because
the
vacuity
of
the
brest
being
filled
with
aire
,
the
motion
of
the
brest
ceasing
,
the
motion
of
the
lungs
ceaseth
also
.
A
few
twigs
of
sinews
come
to
the
membrane
;
but
none
to
the
substance
:
for
they
might
have
caused
paine
in
the
motion
of
the
lungs
.
CAP.
X.
Of
the
Wind-pipe
.
THe
third
entrall
contained
in
the
brest
is
trachaea
,
or
aspera
arteria
,
fistula
and
canna
pulmonis
,
the
wind-pipe
.
It
is
a
pipe
by
the
which
the
lungs
as
bellowes
draw
the
aire
,
for
the
refreshing
of
the
heart
,
and
send
out
fuliginous
vapours
,
turned
out
from
the
heart
by
arteria
venosa
.
The
substance
of
it
is
cartilaginous
,
because
by
it
living
creatures
cause
their
noises
,
and
soundings
,
and
so
it
must
have
beene
hard
;
yet
not
so
hard
as
a
bone
,
because
the
motion
had
beene
painfull
.
It
is
not
framed
of
one
whole
piece
,
for
then
it
would
have
remained
still
in
one
positure
,
and
could
not
have
suffered
contraction
and
dilatation
.
Wherefore
it
is
made
up
of
sundry
round
cartilages
,
which
are
tyed
together
by
ligaments
,
which
in
men
are
more
fleshy
,
is
beasts
more
membranous
.
The
fourth
part
of
these
cartilaginous
ringes
towards
the
gullet
is
wanting
,
and
is
supplied
by
a
membranous
substance
,
that
swallowing
of
solid
things
might
not
be
hindered
.
It
consisteth
of
two
parts
:
the
upper
is
called
larynx
,
the
lower
bronchus
;
because
it
is
bedewed
with
some
part
of
the
drinke
:
for
if
you
give
to
a
dogge
saffron
disolved
in
milk
,
if
you
presently
kill
him
,
and
open
the
lungs
,
you
shall
find
some
part
of
this
mixture
.
The
branches
of
the
wind-pipe
disseminat
thorow
the
lungs
,
as
placed
middle
between
vena
arteriosa
,
which
is
in
the
hinder
part
,
and
arteria
venosa
,
which
is
in
the
forepart
:
which
are
joyned
by
anastomosis
or
inosculation
.
It
is
girt
with
two
membranes
.
The
externallis
thin
,
and
cleaveth
fast
to
the
ligaments
of
the
rings
,
and
guideth
the
recurrent
nerves
thither
.
The
internall
is
thicker
,
and
preceedeth
from
the
membrane
,
which
covereth
the
roofe
of
the
mouth
.
This
being
strong
,
is
not
so
easily
offended
by
salt
rheumes
,
and
shin
liquours
.
It
is
very
sensible
,
that
it
might
be
the
more
easily
moved
to
send
forth
things
offensive
.
It
is
also
bedewed
with
an
unctuous
humour
,
to
withstand
the
injury
of
sharp
things
,
and
to
cause
the
voyce
to
be
more
pleasant
.
So
if
salt
rheumes
bedew
this
membrane
,
the
voyce
becomes
hoarse
;
if
this
humour
be
dryed
in
fevers
,
squeeking
.
Larynx
is
the
upper
part
of
the
wind-pipe
.
When
the
gullet
bendeth
downward
in
swallowing
,
this
starteth
upwards
to
give
way
to
swallowing
;
it
hath
five
cartilages
.
1.
Scutiformis
,
or
buckler-like
,
for
within
it
is
hollow
,
but
without
embossed
.
That
part
which
sticketh
out
is
called
Pomum
Adami
,
Adams
apple
.
2.
Annularis
,
because
it
is
like
a
Turkish
ring
,
and
compasseth
the
whole
larynx
:
In
the
hinder
part
it
is
broad
,
and
thick
.
3.
And
4.
Guttalis
,
because
it
resembleth
that
part
of
the
pot
,
which
is
called
gutturnium
.
These
two
being
joyned
together
,
make
the
chinke
,
which
fashioneth
the
voyce
.
This
chinke
is
called
glottis
,
or
lingula
,
the
little
tongue
.
5.
Is
Epiglottis
,
being
set
above
the
glottis
;
it
shutteth
it
.
It
is
of
a
soft
substance
resembling
a
tongue
,
or
the
leafe
of
the
wood-bind
,
and
on
every
side
bound
with
a
membrane
,
proceeding
from
the
mouth
.
The
Larynx
hath
veins
from
the
externall
jugular
,
arteries
from
the
Soporall
,
and
nerves
from
the
recurrent
branches
of
the
sixt
paire
.
The
glandules
of
the
larynx
are
either
superior
or
inferior
.
The
superior
are
two
,
one
on
each
side
of
the
uvula
or
gargareon
,
which
are
called
vulgarly
amigdalae
or
the
almonds
;
these
receive
humidity
from
the
braine
,
which
they
turn
in
flegme
to
moisten
the
larynx
,
throat
,
tongue
,
and
gullet
,
and
to
be
a
meane
for
tasting
:
for
tasting
cannot
be
performed
without
moysture
.
They
are
seated
about
the
root
of
the
tongue
,
covered
with
the
skin
of
the
mouth
,
and
receive
veins
from
the
jugulars
.
The
inferior
are
in
number
two
,
one
on
each
side
of
the
lower
part
of
the
larynx
,
they
are
fungous
,
and
larger
in
women
than
men
.
The
larynx
is
framed
for
the
voyce
,
the
remote
instruments
of
the
voice
are
the
brest
and
lungs
;
the
neerer
,
either
prepare
,
as
the
wind-pipe
;
or
helpe
,
as
the
sinews
and
muscles
;
or
keepe
it
,
as
the
throat
and
mouth
;
or
immediatly
forme
the
voyce
,
and
that
is
glottis
,
for
the
aire
being
blowne
out
forcibly
by
the
lungs
,
it
beating
upon
the
chinke
,
shut
reasonably
,
procureth
the
voyce
.
CAP.
XI
.
Of
the
gullet
.
OEsophagus
or
gula
,
the
gullet
,
is
that
part
by
the
which
as
a
funnell
,
meat
and
drink
are
turned
down
into
the
stomack
.
It
is
framed
of
three
tunicles
.
The
first
is
very
thin
,
and
appeareth
destitute
of
fibres
;
this
it
hath
from
the
peritonaeum
,
common
also
to
the
stomack
;
the
other
two
are
proper
:
whereof
the
middlemost
is
more
fleshy
,
thick
and
soft
;
it
hath
straight
and
long
fibres
.
The
innermost
is
more
sinewy
,
and
harder
,
the
fibres
of
it
are
transverse
and
circular
.
Veins
some
it
hath
from
ramus
coron
rius
,
or
round
branch
of
the
porta
,
and
some
from
cava
.
Arteries
it
hath
from
the
caeliaca
,
and
the
truck
descending
of
the
Aorta
.
Nerves
it
hath
two
sprigs
of
the
sixt
paire
It
is
joyned
with
the
throat
and
larynx
by
the
skin
of
the
mouth
which
is
communicate
to
it
,
and
the
stomack
:
to
the
spondils
of
the
back
,
the
wind-pipe
,
and
the
parts
adjacent
by
membranes
,
which
arise
of
the
ligaments
of
the
back
.
To
the
hinder
part
a
glandule
groweth
to
cause
more
easie
swallowing
by
moystning
the
part
.
It
hath
foure
muscles
.
The
first
is
the
circular
called
by
Galen
,
Sphincter
,
whereof
we
have
spoken
.
The
second
and
third
are
but
small
ones
,
seated
in
the
throat
,
and
proceeding
from
the
palat
of
the
mouth
,
are
implanted
into
the
beginning
of
the
gullet
.
The
fourth
proceedeth
from
the
inner
part
of
the
chin
,
&
is
inserted
into
the
gullet
.
In
swallowing
,
then
first
of
all
the
circular
muscle
purseth
it self
,
from
whence
it
commeth
to
passe
that
the
oblique
fibres
of
it
,
which
passe
from
the
gullet
to
the
wind-pipe
,
are
made
transverse
,
and
so
the
larynx
is
lifted
up
,
and
the
gula
goeth
downe
.
So
that
as
this
muscle
doth
embrace
the
which
is
to
be
swallowed
,
and
beareth
it
downe
;
so
the
fourth
seconding
this
,
doth
receive
it
and
send
it
further
towards
the
stomack
,
that
it
returneth
not
.
About
the
top
of
the
brest
,
there
is
a
glandulous
body
,
spongious
,
white
and
soft
,
called
thymus
and
lactes
:
In
a
calfe
a
dainty
morsell
.
It
holdeth
up
the
branches
of
the
vena
cava
,
and
aorta
ascending
;
Which
passe
to
the
armes
,
and
saveth
them
from
touching
the
bones
.
CAP.
XII
.
Of
the
neck
.
THe
neck
,
cellum
,
joyneth
the
brest
and
head
together
.
It
is
long
,
to
helpe
the
voyce
:
so
those
living
creatures
which
make
no
noyse
,
have
no
neck
,
as
fishes
;
but
those
who
have
a
long
necke
,
make
a
huge
noyse
,
as
geeses
and
cranes
.
The
inner
parts
are
the
vessels
which
passe
to
the
head
,
the
wind-pipe
,
and
the
gullet
with
others
.
The
outer
are
the
parts
common
of
the
body
,
and
the
muscles
of
these
,
I
will
speake
in
the
discourse
of
muscles
.
The
parts
remarkable
in
section
are
these
.
-
1.
The
soporall
arteries
.
-
2.
Internall
jugulars
.
-
3.
The
recurrent
nerves
betweene
these
.
-
4.
The
larynx
or
wind-pipe-head
,
framed
of
five
cartilages
.
-
5.
Glottis
the
chinke
of
it
.
-
6.
Epiglottis
the
cover
of
the
chinke
.
-
7.
Wula
,
which
is
a
red
,
fleshy
,
and
fungous
substance
.
It
is
covered
with
the
reduplication
of
the
skin
of
the
roofe
of
the
mouth
.
-
8.
Gula
or
favus
,
the
mouth
of
the
stomack
.
-
9.
Tonsillae
,
the
almonds
,
these
moisten
the
mouth
for
chewing
,
and
tongue
for
tasting
.
The
description
of
the
recurrent
nerves
,
you
shall
find
where
the
sixt
conjugation
of
nerves
,
proceeding
from
the
braine
,
is
set
downe
,
cap.
3.
of
the
head
.
THE
THIRD
Book
,
of
the
uppermost
cavity
of
the
body
,
the
Head
,
Caput
in
Latine
.
CAP.
I.
Of
the
Braine
.
Fig.
III.
The
Scalp
hath
foure
parts
.
1.
Sinciput
,
the
forepart
beginning
at
the
forehead
,
and
reaching
to
the
coronall
suture
.
2.
Occiput
,
the
hinder
part
possessing
the
di●●●●ce
betweene
the
future
Lambdoides
,
and
the
first
vertebra
of
the
neck
.
3.
Vertex
,
the
crown
,
that
which
is
betweene
the
former
two
,
somewhat
arched
.
4.
Tempora
,
the
temples
,
which
are
the
laterall
parts
,
betweene
the
eyes
and
the
eares
.
The
parts
whereof
the
scalpe
is
framed
,
are
either
containing
or
contained
.
The
parts
containing
are
either
common
or
proper
.
The
common
are
the
scarfe
skin
,
the
skin
,
the
fat
,
and
membrana
carnosa
.
The
proper
are
either
soft
or
hard
.
The
soft
are
two
:
the
muscles
and
pericranium
.
Of
the
muscles
we
will
speake
in
their
proper
place
.
Pericranium
is
a
membrane
thin
and
soft
,
proceeding
from
the
dura
mater
,
passing
thorow
the
futures
of
the
head
,
covering
the
scull
.
The
hard
containing
part
is
the
scull
.
Looke
for
it
in
the
Treatise
of
Bones
.
The
parts
under
the
skull
contained
,
are
the
meninges
,
the
membranes
,
which
wrap
the
braine
,
and
the
braine
it selfe
.
The
membranes
are
two
.
The
first
is
called
dura
meninx
or
dura
mater
,
the
hard
membrane
,
it
doth
loosely
lap
in
the
whole
braine
and
there
is
some
distance
betweene
it
and
the
skull
,
to
give
way
to
the
motion
of
the
braine
.
It
hath
two
membranes
.
That
next
to
the
skull
is
harder
,
rougher
,
and
of
lesse
sense
,
because
it
was
to
touch
the
skull
.
The
inner
is
smooth
,
whiter
,
and
bedewed
with
a
waterish
humidity
:
It
seemeth
to
spring
from
the
lower
part
of
the
skull
,
because
it
cleaveth
fast
to
it
.
It
is
tyed
to
,
with
the
pia
mater
and
the
braine
by
the
vessels
:
but
to
the
skull
by
small
fibres
arising
of
it selfe
,
passing
thorow
the
sutures
,
and
framing
the
pericranium
It
is
fourefold
where
it
parteth
the
cerebrum
from
the
cerebellum
.
In
the
crowne
of
the
head
,
where
it
parteth
the
braine
into
the
right
and
left
part
,
it
is
doubled
;
and
because
this
reduplication
in
the
hinder
part
is
broader
,
and
forwards
becomming
narrower
representeth
a
sicle
,
it
is
called
falx
.
By
these
foldings
the
Sinus
or
ventricles
are
framed
,
which
are
receptacles
of
plentiful
bloud
and
spirits
.
They
are
in
number
foure
.
The
first
and
second
begin
about
the
b●●sis
of
the
occiput
at
the
sides
of
lamb
doides
,
where
the
veins
and
arteries
discharge
themselves
.
The
third
is
long
,
and
passeth
to
the
nose
,
and
is
framed
of
the
former
two
joyned
together
.
The
fourth
is
short
,
and
betweene
the
cerebrum
and
cerebellum
goeth
to
the
penis
:
This
ariseth
where
the
former
three
meet
.
This
beginning
is
of
some
called
T●r●ular
.
From
hence
veins
do
passe
for
the
nourishing
of
the
braine
;
for
from
the
sinus
,
veins
creepe
upward
to
the
cranium
,
and
by
the
futures
to
the
pericranium
,
and
downeward
to
the
pia
mater
,
cerebrum
,
and
cerebellum
.
These
veins
cleave
by
a
thin
tunicle
to
the
sides
of
the
sinus
;
seeing
these
cavities
have
pulsation
,
these
veins
supply
the
office
both
of
veins
and
arteries
.
These
containe
great
plenty
of
bloud
,
seeing
the
braine
being
large
,
and
in
continuall
lacketh
much
nourishment
.
The
great
bleeding
at
the
nose
happens
by
reason
of
the
third
sinus
opened
.
Pia
mater
or
dura
meninx
immediatly
wrappeth
and
keepeth
in
the
braine
.
Whereofore
it
is
thin
,
soft
,
and
of
exquisite
sense
.
Cerebrum
or
the
brain
,
is
of
a
substance
moyst
and
soft
to
receive
the
impression
of
similitudes
:
for
it
is
the
place
of
imagination
and
memory
.
The
life
is
not
in
the
whole
body
,
of
colour
it
is
white
.
It
hath
the
figure
of
the
skull
.
In
the
forepart
it
hath
bunchings
out
,
called
precessus
mammillares
.
In
the
upper
part
it
is
full
of
foldings
,
as
the
guts
have
,
to
carry
safely
the
vessels
.
In
weight
it
containeth
4.
or
5.
lib.
and
is
as
big
again
as
an
Oxes
braine
.
The
parts
of
the
brain
are
these
,
the
outer
,
and
the
inner
.
The
outer
of
a
grayish
colour
,
or
betweene
white
and
yellow
,
is
of
a
softer
substance
,
and
compasseth
the
inner
.
The
inner
is
more
solide
and
whiter
,
called
Corpus
callosum
.
This
hath
two
parts
:
the
one
is
somewhat
round
which
hath
the
figure
of
the
skull
:
the
other
is
that
which
proceedeth
from
it
.
In
the
large
round
part
,
the
three
ventricles
are
contained
.
The
other
proceedeth
of
the
round
,
and
containeth
the
fourth
ventricle
called
calamus
scriptorius
.
In
this
ventricle
the
animall
spirit
seemeth
to
be
made
,
for
it
is
pure
and
cleane
;
but
the
other
ventricle
,
full
of
impurities
,
having
under
them
the
glandula
pituitaria
,
for
evacuation
of
them
.
The
braine
is
the
towre
of
the
sensitive
soule
.
In
contraction
it
sendeth
the
animall
spirits
into
the
nerves
dispersed
thorow
the
whole
body
:
by
the
which
it
communicateth
the
faculty
of
feeling
and
moving
.
In
dilatation
it
draweth
the
vitall
spirits
from
the
soporall
arteries
,
and
the
aire
by
the
nostrils
,
so
that
the
matter
of
the
animall
spirit
is
arteriall
bloud
,
furnished
with
the
vitall
spirit
and
aire
.
It
may
●e
thought
that
the
animal
spirit
for
sense
,
is
contained
in
the
outer
are
softest
part
of
the
braine
but
for
moving
in
the
inner
more
solide
and
white
part
.
The
braine
hath
five
branches
of
veins
,
from
the
internall
jugulars
:
whereof
some
enter
into
the
ventricles
of
the
dura
mater
,
others
are
spred
thorow
the
menings
,
and
the
substance
of
the
braine
,
out
of
the
cavities
of
the
Dura
mater
.
It
hath
foure
arteries
from
the
soporals
,
and
those
of
the
neck
.
The
portions
which
proceed
from
the
inner
part
of
the
braine
are
cerebellum
,
and
spinalis
medulla
.
Cerebellum
or
the
little
braine
,
is
composed
of
two
round
laterall
parts
,
making
up
as
it
were
a
globe
,
it
hath
two
worme-like
processes
,
one
is
seated
at
the
forepart
,
the
other
at
the
hinder
part
of
it
,
to
hinder
the
obstruction
of
the
fourth
ventricle
,
by
the
compression
of
the
cerebellum
.
The
Spinalis
medulla
is
of
a
harder
substance
than
the
braine
.
It
is
divided
into
two
parts
,
the
right
and
the
left
,
as
the
braine
is
:
which
are
severed
by
the
dura
mater
immediatly
wrapping
it
,
so
that
the
palsie
sometimes
invadeth
but
one
side
.
About
the
sixt
and
seventh
vertebra
of
the
brest
,
it
beginneth
to
be
separate
into
divers
twists
,
which
ending
into
small
haire
like
substances
,
represent
a
Horse-taile
.
This
will
appeare
if
the
marrow
of
a
beast
or
man
newly
killed
,
be
put
in
water
,
&
suffered
to
stand
for
a
while
.
It
is
compassed
with
3.
membranes
:
The
next
to
it
is
from
the
pia
mater
,
the
middlemost
from
the
dura
mater
,
and
the
outmost
from
the
ligament
which
bindeth
the
forepart
of
the
vertebrae
.
One
portion
of
the
Spinalis
medulla
is
within
the
skull
,
foure
inches
in
length
,
above
the
great
hole
of
the
occiput
;
from
whence
all
the
sinews
spring
,
which
are
ascribed
to
the
braine
:
the
other
is
without
the
skull
,
from
whence
the
32.
paire
doe
spring
.
CAP.
II.
Of
other
parts
to
be
seene
in
the
Braine
.
BEsides
those
parts
named
,
sundry
others
are
to
be
shewed
:
whereof
,
-
1.
Is
Rete
mirabile
,
so
called
from
the
wonderfull
knittings
of
the
twigs
of
arteries
,
proceeding
from
the
soporall
about
the
basis
of
the
braine
at
the
sides
of
the
sell
of
os
sphaenoides
:
In
this
is
the
first
preparation
of
the
animall
spirit
.
-
2.
Glandula
pituitaria
so
called
because
it
receiveth
the
thick
pituitous
excrements
from
the
ventricles
by
the
infundibulum
,
and
so
is
placed
at
the
end
of
the
infundibulum
in
the
sell
of
the
sphaenoides
.
It
is
harder
than
ordinary
glandules
;
above
it
is
hollow
,
below
round
:
It
is
covered
with
the
pia
mater
:
the
excrements
which
come
to
it
sometimes
it
turneth
downe
to
the
palat
of
the
mouth
:
somtimes
it
suffereth
to
slip
down
by
the
holes
,
seated
in
the
lower
part
of
the
cranium
.
By
shutting
the
infundibulum
it
keepeth
in
also
the
animall
spirits
.
-
3.
Septum
or
Speculum
lucidum
divideth
in
the
upper
part
the
ventricles
:
It
is
loose
and
wrinckled
,
but
if
spred
out
it
is
cleere
:
some
will
have
it
to
be
a
reduplication
of
the
pia
mater
,
some
a
thin
portion
of
the
braine
it selfe
.
-
4.
Fornix
or
testudo
is
the
lower
white
part
,
where
the
ventricles
are
joyned
.
It
is
triangular
and
under
the
corpus
callosum
.
-
5.
Nates
are
the
two
portions
of
the
roots
of
spinalis
medulla
,
proceeding
from
the
cerebellum
:
these
are
uppermost
and
largest
.
-
6.
Testes
are
the
two
small
portions
proceeding
of
the
roots
from
the
braine
:
these
are
lowermost
.
-
7.
Vulva
is
the
long
chinke
between
the
prominences
.
-
8.
Anus
,
is
nothing
else
but
that
space
which
is
caused
of
the
meeting
of
the
foure
trunkes
of
the
spinalis
medulla
.
-
9.
Glandula
pinealis
or
penis
,
so
called
from
the
figure
:
for
it
is
like
a
seed
of
the
pine
apple
,
or
a
little
pricke
:
it
is
set
about
the
beginning
of
the
hole
,
which
passeth
from
the
middle
ventricle
to
the
fourth
.
It
is
of
a
substance
somewhat
hard
,
and
is
covered
with
a
thin
skin
.
-
10.
Plexus
choroides
vel
reticularis
.
It
is
a
texture
of
small
veins
and
arteries
placed
between
the
fore
ventricles
,
and
the
testudo
or
fornix
.
As
the
animall
spirit
is
first
prepared
in
the
rete
mirabile
,
so
it
is
more
elaborat
here
,
and
perfected
in
the
fourth
ventricle
:
but
kept
in
the
whole
braine
,
as
in
a
storehouse
.
CAP
III.
Of
the
seven
paires
of
sinewes
.
BEfore
I
set
downe
these
paires
,
I
advertise
you
of
one
thing
:
that
all
the
sinewes
of
the
body
spring
from
the
spinalis
medulla
as
it
is
rooted
within
the
skull
,
or
extended
to
the
spina
,
and
not
from
the
braine
.
The
first
paire
is
made
up
by
those
which
are
called
optici
or
visorii
:
so
called
because
they
bring
the
opticke
spirits
to
the
eye
.
They
spring
from
the
nates
,
they
meet
about
the
sell
of
os
sphaenoides
:
not
by
simple
touching
or
intersection
,
but
by
confusion
of
their
substances
,
and
mutuall
penetration
.
Then
being
divided
,
they
passe
to
the
center
of
the
eye
:
these
are
big
,
thick
,
and
soft
.
The
second
paire
is
framed
of
those
called
motorii
oculorum
,
this
paire
springeth
from
the
innermost
part
of
the
beginning
of
the
prolongation
of
the
spinalis
medulla
.
In
the
beginning
it
is
like
to
one
cord
:
which
is
the
cause
that
when
one
eye
moveth
,
the
other
moveth
also
.
This
paire
is
lesser
and
harder
than
the
visorii
:
It
accompanieth
them
.
This
together
with
one
branch
of
the
third
paire
which
passeth
to
the
jaw
,
passeth
thorow
the
long
hole
,
not
the
round
;
and
is
inserted
into
the
muscles
of
the
eye
and
eye-lids
.
The
third
paire
is
made
up
by
those
called
gustatorii
,
because
the
twigs
of
this
paire
being
carried
to
the
membran
of
the
tongue
,
cause
the
sense
of
tasting
.
This
paire
proceedet
from
the
root
of
spinalis
medulla
.
As
it
ariseth
it
is
divided
into
two
large
branches
,
whereof
one
is
carryed
to
the
orbit
of
the
eye
,
by
the
hole
of
the
second
:
The
other
being
carryed
out
of
the
skull
,
by
the
holes
of
the
lower
jaw
bestoweth
twigs
upon
the
muscles
of
the
lower
lip
,
and
every
tooth
.
The
fourth
conjugation
beginneth
about
the
place
of
the
former
but
being
lesse
and
harder
,
accompanying
the
other
,
and
passing
thorow
the
same
hole
,
is
implanted
into
the
membrane
of
the
palat
of
the
mouth
;
this
serveth
also
for
tasting
.
The
first
conjugation
,
the
auditorii
make
up
:
this
paire
beginning
somewhat
below
the
other
,
it
marcheth
by
the
sides
of
the
basis
of
the
braine
,
and
entring
into
os
petrosum
,
is
divided
into
two
branches
;
the
greater
being
inserted
into
the
end
of
cochlea
or
the
hole
of
hearing
,
is
the
instrument
of
hearing
.
The
lesser
being
carried
downe
to
the
first
and
second
vertebra
of
the
neck
,
it
sendeth
twigs
to
the
proper
muscles
of
the
larynx
:
from
hence
ariseth
a
dry
cough
somtimes
when
we
pick
our
eares
somewhat
deeply
.
The
sixt
paire
is
called
vagum
,
because
it
bestoweth
branches
to
sundry
parts
:
&
amongst
the
rest
to
all
the
parts
of
the
belly
,
which
require
sense
.
For
these
being
soft
parts
,
did
not
require
hard
sinewe
from
the
spinalis
medulla
.
It
riseth
a
little
below
the
former
,
each
filure
being
straitwayes
united
;
it
passeth
out
of
the
cranium
,
by
the
hole
of
the
backe
part
of
the
head
,
by
the
which
the
internall
jugular
entereth
:
then
going
down
by
the
sides
of
the
wind-pipe
,
above
the
throat
it
is
divided
into
two
branches
,
whereof
the
one
is
bestowed
upon
the
upper
muscles
of
the
larynx
,
the
bone
of
the
tongue
and
throat
.
The
other
marching
further
,
is
separat
into
two
branches
,
to
wit
,
the
right
and
the
left
;
each
of
these
have
branches
;
the
Recurrens
and
Stomachicus
.
The
recurrent
are
called
also
reversivi
or
recursivi
,
and
vocales
,
because
they
descend
and
ascend
againe
,
and
being
cut
,
hinder
the
voyce
.
The
right
is
winded
about
the
axillar
artery
,
as
about
a
pully
:
The
left
about
the
trunke
of
2the
aorta
descending
,
afterwards
doth
mount
up
to
the
beginning
of
the
muscles
of
the
larynx
.
The
seventh
conjugation
,
which
moveth
the
tongue
,
is
the
hardest
of
all
:
it
hath
it
beginning
,
where
the
cerebellum
endeth
,
and
the
spinalis
medulla
beginneth
.
In
its
beginning
it
hath
divers
sprigs
,
which
afterward
are
united
,
and
passing
thorow
it
owne
oblique
hole
,
is
annexed
to
the
former
paire
;
not
mingled
by
strong
membrans
for
safety
.
Then
being
severed
it
sendeth
most
of
its
twigges
to
the
tongue
;
but
fewest
to
the
muscles
of
the
larynx
.
To
these
7.
two
more
may
be
added
.
The
first
of
them
beginning
from
the
side
of
the
beginning
of
the
spinalis
medulla
by
a
smal
twig
,
marcheth
forwards
betweene
the
second
and
third
conjugation
;
and
by
the
hole
of
the
second
conjugation
;
on
passeth
to
the
orbit
of
the
eye
,
and
is
spent
upon
the
muscles
which
draw
the
eyes
upward
.
The
second
conjugation
may
be
called
Olfactoria
,
the
cause
of
smelling
.
The
finews
of
this
paire
slip
out
of
the
braine
about
the
cell
of
os
sphaenoides
.
Then
to
these
are
annexed
processus
mammillares
or
papillares
,
teat-like
processes
:
They
are
in
number
two
,
and
are
white
,
soft
,
broad
,
and
long
,
bigger
in
beasts
of
exquisit
smelling
than
in
man
,
as
dogs
.
These
are
instruments
of
smelling
,
and
not
the
nose
,
or
the
inner
tunicle
of
it
.
CAP.
IIII.
A
new
way
to
find
out
the
parts
within
the
skull
.
BY
lifting
up
the
braine
,
and
beginning
at
the
lower
part
,
first
appeareth
the
beginning
of
spinalis
medulla
yet
within
the
skull
.
The
cavity
of
this
is
called
calamus
scriptorius
.
To
this
cerebellum
is
annexed
.
These
being
seene
about
the
conjunction
of
the
opticke
nerves
there
appeareth
,
1.
Retemirabile
.
2.
Glandula
pituitaria
.
3.
Infundibulum
,
whose
top
is
called
pelvis
.
Septum
luciduduos
primos
ventricule
dirimens
.
Fornix
sivet
to
studo
corpori
calloso
conjuncta
,
above
the
third
ventricle
.
Nates
are
two
round
knobs
of
the
roots
of
spinalis
medulla
which
spring
from
the
cerebellum
,
under
these
is
anus
.
Testes
are
two
small
prominences
of
this
same
medulla
,
as
it
riseth
from
the
braine
.
These
are
lower
,
and
smaller
;
the
other
are
higher
,
and
bigger
.
Vulva
,
is
a
long
pit
between
the
eminences
.
Plexus
●horoides
or
reticularis
,
it
is
a
frame
or
twisting
,
made
of
small
veins
and
arteries
betweene
the
foure
ventricles
,
and
the
testudo
.
At
the
beginning
of
the
hole
which
passeth
from
the
third
ventricle
to
the
fourth
,
Glandula
pinealis
or
penis
is
seated
.
CAP.
V.
Of
the
face
,
and
first
of
the
parts
containing
of
it
.
I
Have
spoken
of
that
part
of
the
head
which
is
decked
with
haire
.
Now
am
I
to
speak
of
that
part
which
is
not
altogether
garnished
with
haire
:
In
Latine
it
is
called
facies
,
because
it
causeth
one
to
be
knowne
:
and
Vulius
,
because
it
discovereth
the
will
.
The
face
beginneth
,
where
the
haire
ceaseth
to
grow
in
the
head
,
&
reacheth
in
the
end
of
the
chin
.
The
upper
part
is
called
from
the
forehead
,
because
it
bewrayeth
the
mind
which
in
Greeke
is
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
According
to
the
order
of
dissection
it
is
divided
into
the
parts
containing
and
contained
.
The
parts
containing
common
,
are
the
cuticula
and
cutis
.
It
hath
no
membrana
carnosa
,
nor
fat
;
but
onely
betweene
the
muscles
.
The
two
muscles
of
the
forehead
,
about
the
eye
browes
are
thickest
,
and
seeme
to
be
united
:
but
above
they
are
a
little
separat
.
The
sides
adhere
to
the
temporall
muscles
;
and
because
the
skin
doth
firmly
cleave
to
them
,
therfore
the
eye
browes
,
and
skin
of
the
forehead
are
moveable
.
Of
the
second
proper
parts
,
the
bones
,
they
are
set
downe
in
the
doctrine
of
bones
.
The
parts
contained
are
the
foure
instruments
of
the
senses
,
to
wit
,
the
eyes
,
the
eares
,
the
nose
,
and
mouth
,
wherein
is
the
tongue
the
organ
of
tasting
.
CAP.
VI.
Of
the
outer
parts
of
the
eyes
.
THe
eye
in
Latine
is
called
oculus
,
because
it
is
hid
within
the
eye-lids
.
The
hole
wherein
the
eye
is
placed
is
called
capsa
,
or
cava
,
but
barbarously
orbita
:
for
this
is
nothing
else
but
the
print
which
a
wheele
moving
leaveth
in
dirt
or
dust
.
The
eyes
are
in
number
two
,
that
if
one
should
be
lost
,
yet
we
should
not
be
blind
.
The
parts
of
the
eye
,
are
either
externall
,
or
internall
.
The
externall
are
in
number
one
,
the
eye-browes
,
the
hairy
arches
where
the
forehead
endeth
,
the
seats
of
disdain
and
pride
.
Each
eye-brow
is
framed
of
the
skin
,
the
muscle
,
fat
,
and
haire
.
They
are
in
figure
oblique
,
the
end
towards
the
nose
is
called
cap●●
or
the
head
:
the
other
towards
the
temples
is
called
cauda
or
the
taile
.
2.
The
eye-lids
,
palpebrae
.
They
are
framed
of
the
skin
,
the
musculous
fleshy
,
the
pericranium
,
and
the
grasely
welt
.
The
haires
in
them
are
called
cilia
:
they
hinder
the
falling
of
small
bodies
into
the
eyes
;
those
in
the
upper
eye-lid
turne
upwards
,
those
in
the
lower
eye-lid
downward
.
In
man
the
upper
eye-lid
which
moveth
,
is
biggest
;
but
in
birds
the
lower
is
largest
.
3.
The
corners
of
the
eye
.
The
larger
is
towards
the
nose
,
the
lesser
towards
the
temple
.
In
the
larger
corner
the
glandula
or
caruncula
lachrymalis
,
the
fleshy
glandule
is
placed
(
which
stayeth
the
involuntary
shedding
of
teares
)
before
the
hole
which
passeth
into
the
nose
.
The
fistula
in
it
is
called
aegylops
.
CAP.
VII
.
Of
the
muscles
of
the
eye
.
THe
inner
parts
of
the
eye
are
six
in
number
;
the
Fat
,
the
Glandule
,
the
Muscles
,
the
Coats
,
the
Humoun
and
Vessels
.
The
fat
is
placed
about
the
eye
for
three
causes
First
,
it
defendeth
the
eye
from
cold
.
Secondly
,
it
keepeth
it
from
the
hardnes
of
the
bone
.
Thirdly
,
it
filleth
up
the
distances
of
the
muscles
to
further
the
quick
motion
.
The
Glandule
is
seated
in
the
upper
part
of
the
outer
corner
,
and
lodged
in
the
fat
,
still
full
of
a
dewy
substance
,
wherewith
the
eye
is
moystned
to
further
the
nimble
motion
of
it
.
The
muscles
of
the
eye
are
in
number
six
,
whereof
foure
are
straight
,
and
two
oblique
.
-
1.
Of
the
straight
,
is
attollens
or
superbus
,
in
the
upper
part
.
-
2.
Opposit
to
this
is
called
deprimens
or
humilis
.
-
3.
About
the
greater
corner
,
is
called
adducens
or
bibitorius
.
-
4.
Is
about
the
lesser
corner
,
and
is
called
abducens
or
indignatorius
.
All
the
strait
muscles
proceed
from
the
brims
of
the
bone
,
making
the
hole
for
the
opticke
nerve
,
and
cleave
fast
to
the
cornea
,
by
a
broad
and
thin
aponeurosis
.
The
first
of
the
oblique
is
called
superior
,
or
trochlearis
.
It
riseth
neere
the
hole
of
the
opticke
nerve
,
it
endeth
in
a
small
corde
,
which
passeth
thorow
the
cartilago
trochlearis
,
or
pully-like
cartilage
,
and
endeth
obliquely
in
the
upper
part
of
the
cornea
,
it
draweth
the
eye
towards
the
bigger
corner
.
The
second
of
the
oblique
is
called
obliquus
minor
,
or
gracilis
,
and
teres
,
and
brevis
:
it
ariseth
about
the
chink
joyning
the
two
bones
of
the
mandible
,
and
passing
from
the
greater
corner
transversly
compasseth
the
eye
,
and
almost
meeteth
the
tendon
of
the
other
oblique
muscle
in
the
upper
part
.
It
draweth
the
eye
towards
the
lesser
corner
.
When
all
the
muscle
move
alike
,
they
keeps
the
eye
immoveable
The
oblique
muscles
sorowling
of
the
eye
are
called
amatorii
,
and
circumactores
.
CAP.
VIII
.
Of
the
tunicles
of
the
eye
.
THe
tunicles
of
the
eye
are
accompted
six
.
1.
Conjunctiva
or
adnata
,
so
called
because
it
cleaveth
fast
to
the
eye
,
and
the
eye
is
kept
firme
by
it
within
the
orbit
,
that
in
violent
motions
it
be
not
thrust
out
.
It
covereth
the
halfe
of
the
eye
circularly
.
2.
Is
cornea
,
so
called
because
it
is
like
a
lanterne
horne
in
firmnesse
and
brightnesse
.
In
the
hinder
part
it
is
thick
,
and
dark
,
towards
the
forepart
it
groweth
thin
,
that
it
may
be
the
more
bright
.
As
the
conjunctiva
proceedeth
from
pericranium
;
so
this
springeth
from
the
dura
mater
.
3.
Is
uvea
,
because
it
is
like
to
the
huske
of
a
grape
,
which
is
smooth
without
,
and
rough
within
.
This
is
of
sundry
colours
,
that
it
might
represent
to
the
crystallinal
colours
.
The
inner
side
is
very
black
,
that
a
weake
light
might
the
better
bee
seene
by
the
crystallin
humour
:
for
light
in
a
dark
place
shineth
more
brightly
.
This
blacknesse
is
onely
the
excrement
of
bloud
.
This
membrane
covereth
not
the
whole
eye
,
as
cornea
doth
;
but
being
hollow
in
the
forepart
,
doth
make
the
pupilla
,
so
called
from
pupula
:
because
when
we
behold
our selves
in
the
apple
of
ones
eye
wee
seeme
babes
.
It
is
nothing
else
but
the
hole
of
uvea
.
The
circle
about
the
pupilla
is
called
iris
,
from
the
diversity
of
colours
which
it
hath
.
From
this
circle
proceedeth
the
dilatation
and
constriction
of
the
pupilla
.
The
going
and
comming
of
the
light
,
causeth
these
motions
.
If
you
boyle
an
Oxes
eye
you
may
separate
the
iris
from
the
uvea
,
with
the
point
of
your
knife
:
from
this
circle
under
the
uvea
,
small
threeds
spring
,
compassing
the
waterish
humour
:
which
being
let
out
,
these
threeds
vanish
away
,
and
are
dissolved
,
the
circle
remaining
.
Beneath
in
the
compasse
of
the
uvea
,
by
reason
of
these
threeds
,
a
cataract
groweth
.
This
texture
of
filaments
,
is
called
by
some
tunica
ciliaris
;
but
improperly
:
and
by
some
interstitium
ciliare
.
These
filaments
are
so
called
,
because
in
figure
they
are
like
to
the
haires
of
the
eye-lids
.
4.
Is
membrana
pupillaris
,
the
membranous
circle
compassing
the
pupilla
:
for
first
it
may
be
separate
from
the
uvea
,
as
hath
beene
said
:
secondly
,
it
hath
it
peculiar
fibres
:
thirdly
,
it
hath
its
peculiar
motion
,
whereby
the
pupilla
is
dilated
in
cleare
light
,
and
contracted
in
obscure
.
5.
Is
tunica
cristaloides
,
which
is
nothing
else
but
a
membranous
congelation
,
covering
the
forepart
of
the
crystalline
humour
:
It
is
very
thin
and
bright
as
a
looking
glasse
,
that
in
the
superficies
of
it
,
the
visible
formes
might
appeare
as
in
a
looking
glasse
.
6.
Is
aranea
or
retina
because
it
resembleth
a
Spiders
web
or
net
:
this
is
nothing
else
but
some
filaments
,
wherewith
the
vitreous
humour
is
interlaced
,
and
kept
together
.
These
filaments
being
by
incision
much
separated
,
the
vitreous
humour
runneth
as
thin
water
.
CAP.
IX
.
Of
the
humours
of
the
eye
.
THe
humours
of
the
eye
are
in
number
three
.
1.
Is
Humor
aqueus
,
the
watrish
humour
.
It
is
not
onely
set
before
the
crystallin
humour
;
but
it
compasseth
also
the
vitreous
humour
round
about
:
for
if
you
cut
the
eye
in
the
hinder
part
,
it
runneth
out
no
other
wayes
,
than
if
the
forepart
were
incised
.
Where
it
is
placed
before
the
crystallin
humour
,
it
is
a
defence
to
it
,
to
weaken
the
brightnesse
of
the
externall
light
by
hindering
the
suddaine
entering
of
it
.
And
it
is
as
a
spectacle
to
it
,
to
represent
to
the
crystallin
the
species
visibiles
.
Although
it
be
a
spermaticke
part
,
yet
part
of
it
in
man
may
be
let
out
(
as
we
see
in
the
cowching
of
a
cataract
)
without
any
great
hurt
to
the
sight
.
In
a
chicken
if
it
be
let
out
by
pricking
,
it
will
bee
repaired
in
fifteene
daies
.
2.
Is
Humor
Crystallinus
,
the
crystall-like
humour
:
it
is
of
a
compact
watrish
substance
,
somewhat
plaine
before
,
that
some
space
might
be
for
the
receiving
of
objects
;
but
round
behind
where
it
sticketh
in
the
vitreous
humour
.
It
is
seated
neerer
to
the
pupilla
,
that
the
sight
might
be
more
cleere
and
full
.
3.
Is
Humor
vitreus
,
so
called
,
because
it
is
like
to
moulten
glasse
.
In
quantity
it
doth
exceed
the
other
two
:
that
it
might
afford
nourishment
to
the
crystallin
,
the
chiefe
instrument
of
the
sight
.
First
,
it
is
like
a
soft
pillow
to
the
crystallin
.
Secondly
,
it
staieth
the
visible
formers
which
might
escape
the
crystallin
,
and
so
it
is
placed
hindermost
.
Last
of
all
the
vessels
of
the
eye
are
to
bee
touched
:
The
veins
externall
appointed
for
the
nourishment
of
the
eye
,
proceed
from
the
externall
jugulars
:
The
internall
from
plexus
choroides
.
The
arteries
externall
spring
from
the
externall
branches
of
the
soporall
on
each
side
:
the
internall
proceed
from
rete
mirabile
.
There
be
two
nerves
appointed
for
the
eye
:
one
serveth
for
sight
,
called
opticus
;
the
other
for
motion
,
called
motorius
:
whereof
sufficiently
hath
beene
spoken
before
.
CAP.
X.
Of
the
eare
,
and
first
of
the
outward
eare
.
IT
hath
two
parts
,
the
outer
part
called
Auricula
,
and
the
inner
cavities
with
their
furniture
.
Of
the
Auricula
,
some
parts
are
common
,
and
some
proper
.
The
common
are
Cuticula
,
Cutis
,
Membrana
nervea
,
Caro
,
and
Pinguedo
in
the
lobe
.
The
cutis
is
tyed
to
the
cartilage
by
a
membrane
:
in
the
lobe
it
is
more
fleshy
and
fatty
,
in
the
rest
of
the
eare
betweene
the
skin
and
cartilage
,
there
is
but
small
store
of
fat
.
The
proper
parts
are
the
muscles
,
veins
,
arteries
,
sinews
,
and
the
cartilage
.
The
muscles
of
it
are
either
common
or
proper
.
The
common
are
three
.
-
1.
Is
a
part
of
the
frontall
muscle
,
which
rising
from
the
end
of
it
,
and
passing
above
the
temporall
muscle
,
is
inserted
in
the
upper
part
,
to
draw
it
upward
.
-
2.
Is
a
part
of
the
cutaneous
muscle
,
ascending
to
it
above
the
parotides
,
to
draw
it
downe
side-wayes
.
-
3.
Is
a
portion
of
the
occipitall
muscle
,
reaching
to
the
eare
,
and
implanted
in
the
back
part
of
it
to
pull
it
backward
.
It
hath
but
one
proper
muscle
proceeding
from
the
processus
mammillaris
.
Which
lurking
under
the
ligament
of
the
eare
is
inserted
in
the
root
of
the
eare
,
to
pull
it
backward
.
The
last
proper
part
of
the
eare
,
is
the
cartilage
.
If
it
had
been
bony
it
had
been
subject
to
breaking
;
if
fleshy
,
it
had
not
beene
so
sit
to
beat
back
the
sound
:
this
cartilage
is
tyed
to
os
petrosum
,
by
a
strong
ligament
,
which
riseth
from
the
pericranium
,
towards
os
mammillare
,
to
stay
it
up
:
in
man
the
ligament
is
but
one
and
continual
;
but
in
beasts
there
bee
two
or
three
,
according
to
the
bignesse
of
the
eare
.
The
veins
come
from
the
externall
jugulars
:
The
arteries
from
the
carotis
or
soporall
:
The
sinews
from
the
second
paire
of
the
neck
.
It
is
here
to
bee
noted
that
a
branch
of
the
soporall
passeth
by
the
antitragus
of
the
eare
,
to
the
upper
jaw
,
from
whence
the
vitall
spirit
is
carried
to
each
tooth
.
In
horrible
tooth-aches
,
if
this
branch
bee
cut
a
sunder
,
immediatly
the
paine
ceaseth
,
the
sharp
humour
being
intercepted
.
The
outward
eare
is
alwayes
open
,
because
we
have
ever
need
of
this
sense
.
It
is
a
beauty
to
the
head
,
it
is
a
defence
to
the
braine
,
by
mode
rating
the
sounds
,
that
they
may
gently
move
the
tympanum
,
and
it
gathereth
the
sounds
dispersed
in
the
ayre
.
CAP.
XI
.
Of
the
foure
cavities
of
the
eare
.
ALl
those
foure
cavities
are
seated
in
ospetrosum
.
The
first
is
called
meatus
auditorius
,
the
passage
for
hearing
.
It
hath
turnings
to
hinder
the
violent
rushing
in
of
any
thing
to
the
tympanum
.
It
is
oblique
,
that
the
vehemercy
of
a
strong
sound
might
bee
moderat
:
It
is
lastly
narrow
to
hinder
the
going
in
of
small
creatures
.
Wherefore
it
hath
also
haires
and
earewax
,
to
be
as
lymed
twigs
to
entangle
them
.
It
marcheth
obliquely
upward
,
that
if
anything
should
goe
in
,
it
might
the
more
easily
returne
,
or
bee
brought
out
:
it
endeth
at
the
tympanum
.
This
membrane
is
very
dry
,
that
it
might
give
the
better
sound
.
It
is
thin
and
cleare
,
that
the
sounds
may
the
more
readily
be
sent
to
the
internall
ayre
.
It
is
strong
,
that
it
might
be
the
more
able
to
resist
externall
violence
.
It
hath
a
cord
,
for
strength
and
stretching
,
no
other
wayes
than
the
military
drum
.
The
second
cavity
,
is
called
by
Vesalius
pelvis
,
the
tunnel
of
the
eare
;
and
by
Fallopius
concha
,
the
perwinkle
from
its
figure
.
The
furniture
of
this
cavity
serveth
for
three
purposes
:
for
motion
,
for
transmission
of
the
sounds
,
and
for
expurgation
of
the
excrements
.
For
motion
the
three
little
bones
,
the
ligament
,
and
muscles
do
service
.
The
three
little
bones
are
these
,
malleolus
,
incus
,
stapes
,
having
their
names
from
the
likenesse
of
other
externall
things
.
Malleolus
or
the
little
hammer
is
somewhat
long
and
cleaveth
to
the
tympanum
by
the
ligament
.
The
second
is
Incus
the
anvill
,
not
onely
for
the
figure
,
but
for
the
use
also
;
because
like
an
anvill
it
receiveth
the
strokes
of
the
malleolus
moved
.
The
third
is
Stapes
,
the
stirrop
.
It
is
in
figure
triangular
.
In
the
middle
hollow
,
to
give
way
to
the
passing
of
the
aire
to
the
labyrinth
.
These
cleave
together
on
following
another
in
order
.
These
little
bone
serve
for
uses
.
1.
They
strengthen
the
tympanum
that
it
be
not
torne
by
the
violence
of
the
ayre
.
Therefore
the
hammer
with
one
of
the
feet
of
the
anvill
,
leane
upon
the
drumme
.
2.
That
these
beating
against
the
tympanum
,
might
the
better
deliver
the
sound
to
the
auditory
sinew
.
3.
That
these
bones
being
shaken
and
beaten
against
the
drum
,
might
frame
the
diversities
of
sounds
,
as
the
teeth
,
the
distinction
of
words
and
letters
.
These
bones
have
neither
cartilage
nor
marrow
.
2.
They
have
no
periostium
.
3.
In
Infants
they
are
as
big
and
perfect
as
in
men
.
4.
They
are
paced
up
by
a
ligament
the
second
instrument
for
motion
,
that
being
shaken
by
the
internall
aire
moved
by
the
externall
,
the
sharper
sound
might
be
caused
:
of
the
instruments
appointed
for
motion
,
the
muscles
are
the
last
.
Whereof
the
one
is
without
the
drum
above
in
meatus
auditorius
,
whose
tendon
is
inserted
into
the
center
of
the
tympanum
,
against
the
which
,
the
malleolus
is
inserted
,
to
draw
it
outward
together
with
the
hammer
.
The
other
is
within
the
drum
in
os
petrosum
,
inserted
by
a
double
tendon
into
the
hammer
to
draw
it
back
.
Neere
the
tympanum
above
,
a
narrow
hole
appeareth
,
which
is
an
enterance
to
a
cave
,
having
many
partitions
not
unlike
to
the
hony
combes
.
This
is
full
of
internall
aire
.
About
the
end
of
this
cavity
directly
against
the
tympanum
,
there
are
two
perforations
called
fenestellae
,
or
little
windowes
:
wherof
the
one
is
ovall
,
the
entrance
to
the
labyrinth
:
the
other
lesser
,
the
beginning
of
cochlea
.
Last
of
all
,
there
is
in
this
cavity
a
small
cartilaginous
passage
from
the
eare
to
the
palatum
:
to
purifie
the
internall
aire
.
This
cavity
hath
a
value
,
that
there
might
be
egresse
,
but
no
regresse
.
The
third
cavity
is
called
labyrinthus
,
having
sundry
windings
,
from
whence
it
hath
its
name
:
all
which
returue
to
this
same
cavity
.
There
are
six
semi-circles
in
this
cavity
.
The
end
of
these
windings
is
to
cause
the
aire
passing
thorow
narrow
slreits
to
make
the
greater
sound
,
or
to
mitigate
the
sound
,
which
was
redoubled
within
the
pelvis
as
an
Eccho
,
by
passing
thorow
these
circulations
.
The
fourth
cavity
is
called
cochlea
,
or
the
wilke
of
the
eare
,
from
the
figure
:
because
it
hath
three
,
sometimes
foure
wreathings
;
within
these
there
is
a
chinke
by
the
which
the
sound
passeth
to
the
braine
and
the
bilious
excrement
falleth
into
the
eare
.
Hearing
is
thus
caused
.
First
,
the
aire
received
in
the
first
cavity
,
doth
gently
move
the
tympanum
,
which
being
shaken
tosseth
the
three
small
bones
joyned
to
it
;
then
the
kind
of
sound
is
impressed
into
the
internall
aire
,
which
having
the
quality
of
the
sound
,
and
circular
by
the
windings
of
the
labyrinth
,
to
make
it
pure
is
conveighed
thorow
the
cochlea
,
and
delivered
to
nervus
auditorius
,
that
the
animall
spirit
may
present
it
to
the
common
sense
,
the
judge
of
all
species
and
formes
.
CAP.
XII
.
Of
the
Nose
.
THe
skin
cleaveth
so
fast
to
the
muscles
and
cartilages
,
that
it
can
hardly
bee
severed
without
renting
.
The
muscles
are
seven
:
whereof
one
is
common
and
six
proper
.
They
onely
move
the
cartilages
of
the
nose
.
The
veins
come
from
the
enternall
jugular
.
The
arteries
from
the
soporals
,
and
the
finews
from
the
third
pairs
.
The
bones
of
the
nose
are
in
number
foure
:
the
cartilages
five
:
the
inner
membrane
which
covereth
the
sides
of
the
nose
proceedeth
from
the
dura
mater
,
passing
thorow
the
holes
of
the
ethmoides
.
The
muscles
membrane
,
draweth
in
the
nostrils
.
The
haires
straine
(
as
it
were
)
the
aire
,
and
keepe
out
insects
.
From
the
red
and
spongious
fleshy
portions
,
with
the
which
the
distances
of
the
spongious
bones
are
filled
,
the
polypus
springeth
.
The
upper
part
of
the
nose
which
is
bony
,
is
called
dorsum
nasi
:
the
ridge
,
spina
:
the
laterall
parts
,
where
the
cartilages
are
,
are
called
alae
or
pinnae
:
The
tip
of
the
nose
,
globulus
,
orbiculus
,
and
pyrula
:
The
fleshy
part
next
to
the
upper
lip
,
columna
.
The
uses
of
the
nose
are
eight
.
-
1.
By
it
the
aire
is
taken
into
the
braine
,
for
the
generation
of
the
animall
spirits
.
-
2.
The
lungs
draw
in
by
it
the
aire
,
for
the
refreshing
of
the
heart
,
and
the
generation
of
the
〈◊〉
tall
spirits
.
-
3.
That
by
it
smels
might
be
carried
to
precessus
mammillares
.
-
4.
By
it
the
braine
dischargeth
excrements
.
-
5.
It
furthereth
the
speech
.
-
6.
It
beautifieth
the
face
.
-
7.
It
parteth
the
eyes
that
the
one
should
not
see
the
other
:
which
would
have
hindered
the
sight
.
It
is
a
defence
into
them
also
,
and
staigth
the
visible
species
.
-
8.
By
fleering
up
it
expresseth
anger
:
and
in
the
Hebrew
tongue
is
taken
for
anger
.
CAP.
XIII
.
Of
the
Mouth
.
IT
is
called
Os
,
from
the
letter
O
:
In
pronouncing
of
which
it
openeth
it selfe
.
The
mouth
that
serveth
for
breathing
:
Secondly
,
for
receiving
of
food
:
Thirdly
,
for
speaking
and
lastly
,
to
discharge
the
excrements
of
the
braine
,
lungs
,
and
stomack
:
It
beginneth
at
the
lips
,
and
reacheth
to
the
throat
.
The
parts
of
it
are
either
externall
or
internall
:
the
externall
are
labia
or
the
lips
,
from
lambo
.
They
are
in
number
two
:
to
wit
,
the
upper
,
and
lower
;
they
have
to
further
motions
,
thirteen
muscles
,
whereof
eight
are
proper
,
and
five
common
to
the
cheekes
and
lips
.
The
lips
are
of
a
fungous
substance
;
the
skin
doth
firmly
cleave
to
the
muscles
.
They
are
covered
within
with
a
tunicle
common
to
the
mouth
and
stomack
.
And
from
hence
commeth
the
trembling
of
the
lower
lip
before
vomiting
.
The
lips
serve
first
for
the
conveniency
of
eating
and
drinking
.
Secondly
,
for
the
beautifying
of
the
face
,
if
they
bee
well
fashioned
.
Thirdly
,
to
containe
the
spittle
in
the
mouth
:
Fourthly
,
to
keepe
the
gums
and
teeth
from
externall
injuries
.
Fifthly
,
to
keepe
the
gums
and
teeth
from
externall
injuries
.
Fifthly
,
to
serve
for
the
framing
of
the
speech
.
Sixthly
,
to
serve
for
kissing
.
The
conjuction
of
the
lips
make
the
laterall
parts
of
the
mouth
,
which
are
called
buccae
,
the
cheeks
.
The
inner
parts
of
the
mouth
are
these
.
1.
Gingivae
or
the
gums
.
They
are
fleshy
,
destitute
of
motion
,
to
keepe
the
teeth
in
their
sockets
.
2.
The
teeth
,
which
are
bony
,
both
to
chew
the
meat
,
and
to
fashion
the
speech
:
each
tooth
hath
two
parts
;
one
without
the
gum
,
called
Basis
;
the
other
within
,
called
Radix
,
or
the
root
.
The
root
below
receiveth
a
little
veine
,
artery
,
and
nerve
.
The
incisores
and
canini
have
but
one
fang
:
The
lower
molares
have
two
fangs
;
but
the
upper
molares
,
three
.
In
children
from
the
seventh
moneth
,
untill
two
yeeres
be
compleat
,
twenty
teeth
come
out
,
now
one
,
then
another
.
Of
these
teeth
some
are
called
incisores
;
the
first
fore
teeth
in
number
foure
in
each
gum
:
some
canini
adjacent
to
these
,
on
each
side
one
.
The
rest
are
called
molares
.
3.
The
third
internall
part
of
the
mouth
is
palatum
,
or
the
roofe
of
the
mouth
:
It
is
vauted
,
that
the
aire
being
repercussed
the
voice
should
be
the
sharper
.
It
is
wrinckled
and
rough
above
the
bone
,
that
it
might
more
firmly
cleave
to
it
,
and
it
might
the
better
keepe
the
meat
,
while
it
is
a
chewing
.
4.
And
5.
Of
the
almonds
,
and
uvula
,
I
have
spoken
in
the
discourse
of
the
neck
.
6.
Of
the
internall
parts
is
the
tongue
,
in
Latine
called
Lingua
à
lingendo
,
from
licking
.
The
flesh
of
it
is
spongious
,
that
it
might
receive
the
qualities
of
the
sapors
,
and
judge
of
them
.
In
figure
it
is
pyramidall
.
The
tunicle
with
the
which
it
is
covered
,
proceedeth
from
the
dura
mater
.
Veins
it
hath
from
the
externall
jugulars
.
Under
the
tongue
they
are
called
ranulares
,
from
their
colour
.
The
arteries
come
from
the
carotides
.
Sinews
it
hath
from
the
third
and
seventh
paire
.
The
muscles
which
move
it
are
six
.
It
is
divided
into
two
parts
by
a
line
going
along
it
,
and
so
in
hemiplegia
,
onely
one
halfe
may
bee
affected
.
Of
the
ligaments
,
the
lower
is
called
fraenum
,
and
franulum
.
If
it
bee
extended
to
the
top
of
the
tongue
,
it
hindereth
sucking
in
children
:
and
from
this
they
are
said
to
be
tongue-tyed
.
In
this
case
the
ligament
is
to
be
cut
.
The
tongue
hath
foure
uses
.
1.
It
is
the
instrument
of
tasting
.
2.
It
uttereth
the
speech
.
3.
It
helpeth
chewing
by
gathering
of
the
meat
,
and
tossing
it
to
and
fro
,
and
turning
it
downe
to
the
stomack
.
4.
It
serveth
for
licking
.